Support size relocation only for ELF
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
7ca01ed9
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011,
5@c 2012, 2013
8a308ae8 6@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 7@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 8@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
9@include configdoc.texi
10@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 11@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 12@c man end
252b5132
RH
13
14@c @smallbook
15
ff5dcc92
SC
16@macro gcctabopt{body}
17@code{\body\}
18@end macro
19
0285c67d
NC
20@c man begin NAME
21@ifset man
22@c Configure for the generation of man pages
23@set UsesEnvVars
24@set GENERIC
0285c67d 25@set ARM
ac145307 26@set C6X
49fa1e15 27@set H8300
0285c67d 28@set HPPA
0285c67d 29@set I960
0285c67d 30@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 31@set M68K
3c3bdf30 32@set MMIX
2469cfa2 33@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
9fbcbd81 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
7ca01ed9
NC
592001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2012, 2013
60Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 61
cf055d54 62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 68@end copying
252b5132
RH
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 72@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 73@titlepage
71ba23f6 74@title The GNU linker
252b5132 75@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
252b5132
RH
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81 97Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
7ca01ed9
NC
981999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009,
992012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 100
0285c67d 101Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 102under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
103or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
104with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
105Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 106section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 107@c man end
252b5132 108
252b5132
RH
109@end titlepage
110@end iftex
4ecceb71 111@contents
252b5132
RH
112@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
113
84ec0e6d 114@ifnottex
252b5132 115@node Top
71ba23f6 116@top LD
e49e529d
JM
117This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
118@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
119@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
120@end ifset
121version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 122
cf055d54 123This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
124Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
125in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 126
252b5132
RH
127@menu
128* Overview:: Overview
129* Invocation:: Invocation
130* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
131@ifset GENERIC
132* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
133@end ifset
134@ifclear GENERIC
135@ifset H8300
136* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
137@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
138@ifset Renesas
139* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
140@end ifset
141@ifset I960
142* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
143@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
144@ifset ARM
145* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
150@ifset HPPA
151* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
152@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
153@ifset M68K
154* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
155@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
156@ifset POWERPC
157* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset POWERPC64
160* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
251* Options:: Command Line Options
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
256@section Command Line Options
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca
NC
335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
355
356Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifset I960
382@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
383@kindex -A @var{arch}
384@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
385@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
386@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
387In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
388Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
389@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
390the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 391archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
392family}, for details.
393
ff5dcc92 394Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
395other architecture families.
396@end ifset
397
398@ifclear SingleFormat
399@cindex binary input format
400@kindex -b @var{format}
401@kindex --format=@var{format}
402@cindex input format
403@cindex input format
404@item -b @var{input-format}
405@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
406@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
407file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 408@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 409that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 410configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 411to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
412default input format the most usual format on each machine.
413@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
414supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
415formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
416@xref{BFD}.
417
418You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
419binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
420linking object files of different formats), by including
421@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 422particular format.
252b5132
RH
423
424The default format is taken from the environment variable
425@code{GNUTARGET}.
426@ifset UsesEnvVars
427@xref{Environment}.
428@end ifset
429You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
430@code{TARGET};
431@ifclear man
432see @ref{Format Commands}.
433@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
434@end ifclear
435
436@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
438@cindex compatibility, MRI
439@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
440@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 441For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 442files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
443@ifclear man
444@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
445@end ifclear
446@ifset man
447the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
448@end ifset
449Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 450the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
451scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
452If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
453specified by any @samp{-L} options.
454
455@cindex common allocation
456@kindex -d
457@kindex -dc
458@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 459@item -d
252b5132
RH
460@itemx -dc
461@itemx -dp
462These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
463compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
464even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
465script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
466@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
467
7ee314fa
AM
468@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
471@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
472Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
473@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
474specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
475will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
476option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 477The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 478
252b5132
RH
479@cindex entry point, from command line
480@kindex -e @var{entry}
481@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 482@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
483@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
484Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
485program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
486named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
487and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
488base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
489@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
490and other ways of specifying the entry point.
491
b58f81ae
DJ
492@kindex --exclude-libs
493@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
494Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 495exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
496@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
497automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
498port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
499explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
500option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
501be treated as hidden.
502
e1c37eb5
DK
503@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
504@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
505Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
506should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
507into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
508may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
509used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
510the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
511match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
512command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
513of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
514regardless of this option.
515
252b5132
RH
516@cindex dynamic symbol table
517@kindex -E
518@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 519@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
520@item -E
521@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
522@itemx --no-export-dynamic
523When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
524option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
525all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
526set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
527
528If you do not use either of these options (or use the
529@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
530dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
531referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
532
533If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
534back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
535dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
536linking the program itself.
537
55255dae 538You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 539be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 540See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 541
8b747e1a
DK
542Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
543support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
544the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
545
36f63dca 546@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
547@cindex big-endian objects
548@cindex endianness
549@kindex -EB
550@item -EB
551Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
552
553@cindex little-endian objects
554@kindex -EL
555@item -EL
556Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 557@end ifclear
252b5132 558
2509a395
SL
559@kindex -f @var{name}
560@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
561@item -f @var{name}
562@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
563When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
564to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
565table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
566symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
567
568If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
569run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
570the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
571first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
572@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
573in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
574Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
575implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
576machine specific performance.
577
578This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
579will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
580
2509a395
SL
581@kindex -F @var{name}
582@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 583@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 584@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
585When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
586the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
587of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
588on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
589
590If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
591run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
592dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
593filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
594found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
595used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
596@var{name}.
597
ff5dcc92 598Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 599toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
600object files.
601@ifclear SingleFormat
602The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 603@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 604@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
605environment variable.
606@end ifclear
607The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
608creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 609
3dbf70a2 610@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
611@kindex -fini=@var{name}
612@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
613When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
614executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
615address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
616the function to call.
617
252b5132
RH
618@kindex -g
619@item -g
620Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
621
2509a395
SL
622@kindex -G @var{value}
623@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 624@cindex object size
2509a395 625@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
626@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
627Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
628@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
629MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
630sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
631
632@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 633@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 634@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 635@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
636@itemx -soname=@var{name}
637When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
638the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
639which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
640linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
641field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
642
643@kindex -i
644@cindex incremental link
645@item -i
646Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
647
3dbf70a2 648@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
649@kindex -init=@var{name}
650@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
651When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
652executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
653of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
654function to call.
655
252b5132 656@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 657@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 658@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 659@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
660@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
661Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
662list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
663If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 664will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 665will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 666
ff5dcc92 667On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
668files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
669and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
670called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
671@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
672indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
673to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
674@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
675
676The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
677specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
678was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
679command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
680archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
681the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
682
ff5dcc92 683See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
684archives multiple times.
685
686You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
687
688@ifset GENERIC
689This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 690if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
691behaviour of the AIX linker.
692@end ifset
693
694@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 695@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 696@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 697@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 698@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
699Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
700for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
701option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
702in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
703on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 704@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
705order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
706how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
707option is specified.
252b5132 708
9c8ebd6a
DJ
709If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
710by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
a712da20
NC
831@kindex -q
832@kindex --emit-relocs
833@cindex retain relocations in final executable
834@item -q
835@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 836Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
837Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
838order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
839in larger executables.
840
dbab7a7b
NC
841This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
842
4f471f39
RS
843@kindex --force-dynamic
844@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
845@item --force-dynamic
846Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
847to VxWorks targets.
848
252b5132
RH
849@cindex partial link
850@cindex relocatable output
851@kindex -r
1049f94e 852@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 853@item -r
1049f94e 854@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 855Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 856turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
857linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
858magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
859@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 860@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
861If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
862linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
863constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
864
62bf86b4
HPN
865When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
866partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
867relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
868example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
869with input files in other formats at all.
870
252b5132
RH
871This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
872
873@kindex -R @var{file}
874@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
875@cindex symbol-only input
876@item -R @var{filename}
877@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
878Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
879relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
880to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
881programs. You may use this option more than once.
882
ff5dcc92 883For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 884followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 885the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
886
887@kindex -s
888@kindex --strip-all
889@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 890@item -s
252b5132
RH
891@itemx --strip-all
892Omit all symbol information from the output file.
893
894@kindex -S
895@kindex --strip-debug
896@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 897@item -S
252b5132
RH
898@itemx --strip-debug
899Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
900
901@kindex -t
902@kindex --trace
903@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 904@item -t
252b5132 905@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 906Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
907
908@kindex -T @var{script}
909@kindex --script=@var{script}
910@cindex script files
911@item -T @var{scriptfile}
912@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
913Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 914@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 915@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
916output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
917the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
918specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
919options accumulate.
252b5132 920
14be8564
L
921@kindex -dT @var{script}
922@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
923@cindex script files
924@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
925@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
926Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
927
928This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
929processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
930command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
931@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
932behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
933command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
934the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
935@samp{gcc}).
936
252b5132
RH
937@kindex -u @var{symbol}
938@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
939@cindex undefined symbol
940@item -u @var{symbol}
941@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
942Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
943symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
944modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
945different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
946option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
947
948@kindex -Ur
949@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 950@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
951For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
952@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 953turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
954@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
955It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
956with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
957be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
958@samp{-r} for the others.
959
577a0623
AM
960@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
961@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
962Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
963@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
964missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
965specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
966multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
967input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
968in a linker script.
a854a4a7 969
252b5132
RH
970@kindex -v
971@kindex -V
972@kindex --version
973@cindex version
974@item -v
975@itemx --version
976@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 977Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
978lists the supported emulations.
979
980@kindex -x
981@kindex --discard-all
982@cindex deleting local symbols
983@item -x
984@itemx --discard-all
985Delete all local symbols.
986
987@kindex -X
988@kindex --discard-locals
989@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 990@item -X
252b5132 991@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
992Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
993system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
994or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
995
996@kindex -y @var{symbol}
997@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998@cindex symbol tracing
999@item -y @var{symbol}
1000@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1001Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1002option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1003to prepend an underscore.
1004
1005This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1006don't know where the reference is coming from.
1007
1008@kindex -Y @var{path}
1009@item -Y @var{path}
1010Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1011for Solaris compatibility.
1012
1013@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1014@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1015The recognized keywords are:
1016@table @samp
1017
1018@item combreloc
1019Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1020lookup caching possible.
1021
1022@item defs
560e09e9 1023Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1024shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1025
6aa29e7b
JJ
1026@item execstack
1027Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1028
b039ef04
L
1029@item global
1030This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1031the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1032of subsequently loaded libraries.
1033
cd6d6c15
NC
1034@item initfirst
1035This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1036It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1037before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1038the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1039the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1040objects.
1041
1042@item interpose
1043Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1044but the primary executable.
1045
5fa222e4
AM
1046@item lazy
1047When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1048dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1049the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1050Lazy binding is the default.
1051
cd6d6c15
NC
1052@item loadfltr
1053Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1054runtime.
1055
1056@item muldefs
1057Allows multiple definitions.
1058
1059@item nocombreloc
1060Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1061
1062@item nocopyreloc
1063Disables production of copy relocs.
1064
1065@item nodefaultlib
1066Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1067ignore any default library search paths.
1068
1069@item nodelete
1070Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1071
1072@item nodlopen
1073Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1074
1075@item nodump
1076Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1077
6aa29e7b
JJ
1078@item noexecstack
1079Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1080
1081@item norelro
1082Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1083
cd6d6c15
NC
1084@item now
1085When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1086dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1087when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1088deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1089first called.
1090
1091@item origin
1092Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1093
6aa29e7b
JJ
1094@item relro
1095Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1096
24718e3b
L
1097@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1098Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1099
1100@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1101Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1102
04c3a755
NS
1103@item stack-size=@var{value}
1104Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1105Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1106@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1107
cd6d6c15
NC
1108@end table
1109
ece2d90e 1110Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -(
1113@cindex groups of archives
1114@item -( @var{archives} -)
1115@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1116The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1117either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1118
1119The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1120references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1121the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1122archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1123object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1124would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1125they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1126resolved.
1127
1128Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1129it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1130more archives.
1131
69da35b5
NC
1132@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1133@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1134@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1135@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1136Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1137recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1138and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1139the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1140behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1141so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1142restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1143
4a43e768
AM
1144@kindex --as-needed
1145@kindex --no-as-needed
1146@item --as-needed
1147@itemx --no-as-needed
1148This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1149on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1150the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1151on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1152needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1153emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1154from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1155DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1156undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1157@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1158
e56f61be
L
1159@kindex --add-needed
1160@kindex --no-add-needed
1161@item --add-needed
1162@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1163These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1164their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1165options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1166and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1167
252b5132
RH
1168@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1169@item -assert @var{keyword}
1170This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -Bdynamic
1173@kindex -dy
1174@kindex -call_shared
1175@item -Bdynamic
1176@itemx -dy
1177@itemx -call_shared
1178Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1179for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1180default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1181for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1182multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1183@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1184
a1ab1d2a
UD
1185@kindex -Bgroup
1186@item -Bgroup
1187Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1188section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1189object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1190@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1191only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1192
252b5132
RH
1193@kindex -Bstatic
1194@kindex -dn
1195@kindex -non_shared
1196@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1197@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1198@itemx -dn
1199@itemx -non_shared
1200@itemx -static
1201Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1202platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1203variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1204may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1205library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1206option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1207option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1208shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1209references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1210libraries.
252b5132
RH
1211
1212@kindex -Bsymbolic
1213@item -Bsymbolic
1214When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1215definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1216for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1217within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1218platforms which support shared libraries.
1219
40b36307
L
1220@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1221@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1222When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1223symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1224This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1225libraries.
1226
55255dae
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1228@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1230typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1231global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1232within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1233to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1234in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1235which support shared libraries.
1236
1237The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1238scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1239
40b36307
L
1240@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1241@item --dynamic-list-data
1242Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1243
1244@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1245@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1247is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1248
0b8a70d9
L
1249@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1250@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1252
252b5132
RH
1253@kindex --check-sections
1254@kindex --no-check-sections
1255@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1256@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1257Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1258been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1259perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1260suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1261allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1262restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1263Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1264force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1265option.
252b5132 1266
ddbb8a31
NC
1267@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1269@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1271This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1272by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1273command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1274output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1275input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1276specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1277follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1278behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1279
1280This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1281libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1282mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1283their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1284required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1285the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1286dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1287symbols.
1288
252b5132
RH
1289@cindex cross reference table
1290@kindex --cref
1291@item --cref
1292Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1293generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1294Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1295
1296The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1297easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1298sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1299symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1300definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1301
4818e05f
AM
1302@cindex common allocation
1303@kindex --no-define-common
1304@item --no-define-common
1305This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1306The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1307@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1308
1309The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1310the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1311of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1312forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1313Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1314from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1315This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1316and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1317duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1318paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1319
252b5132 1320@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1321@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1322@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1323Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1324address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1325times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1326limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1327context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1328symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1329constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1330using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1331Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1332space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1333@var{expression}.
1334
1335@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1336@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1337@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1338@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1339@itemx --no-demangle
1340These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1341and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1342present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1343underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1344mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1345different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1346to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1347demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1348is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1349
1350@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1351@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1352@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1353@item -I@var{file}
1354@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1355Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1356generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1357linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1358doing.
1359
7ce691ae 1360@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1361@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1362@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1363@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1364Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1365with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1366
252b5132
RH
1367@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1368@item --force-exe-suffix
1369Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1370
1371If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1372@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1373the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1374option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1375Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1376it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1377
1378@kindex --gc-sections
1379@kindex --no-gc-sections
1380@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1381@item --gc-sections
1382@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1383Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1384targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1385performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1386@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1387
d5465ba2
AM
1388@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1389examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1390symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1391command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1392referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1393libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1394referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1395the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1396relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1397
ac69cbc6 1398This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1399@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1400specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1401a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1402
c17d87de
NC
1403@kindex --print-gc-sections
1404@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1405@cindex garbage collection
1406@item --print-gc-sections
1407@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1408List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1409printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1410collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1411default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1412be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1413line.
1414
30824704
RM
1415@kindex --print-output-format
1416@cindex output format
1417@item --print-output-format
1418Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1419other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1420in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1421
252b5132
RH
1422@cindex help
1423@cindex usage
1424@kindex --help
1425@item --help
1426Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1427
ea20a7da
CC
1428@kindex --target-help
1429@item --target-help
1430Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1431
2509a395
SL
1432@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1433@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1434Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1435@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1436
1437@cindex memory usage
1438@kindex --no-keep-memory
1439@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1440@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1441symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1442instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1443necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1444while linking a large executable.
1445
1446@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1447@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1448@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1449@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1450Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1451is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1452The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1453behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1454libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1455
aa713662
L
1456@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1457@kindex -z muldefs
1458@item --allow-multiple-definition
1459@itemx -z muldefs
1460Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1461report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1462first definition will be used.
1463
b79e8c78 1464@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1465@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1466@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1467@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1468Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1469This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1470determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1471shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1472how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1473
903249d7
NC
1474The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1475referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1476an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1477a shared library.
1478
1479The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1480libraries specified at link time are that:
1481
1482@itemize @bullet
1483@item
1484A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1485that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1486resolvable at load time.
1487@item
1488There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1489symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1490
1491The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1492select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1493architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1494appropriate memset function.
1495@end itemize
b79e8c78 1496
31941635
L
1497@kindex --no-undefined-version
1498@item --no-undefined-version
1499Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1500it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1501will be issued instead.
1502
3e3b46e5
PB
1503@kindex --default-symver
1504@item --default-symver
1505Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1506exported symbols.
1507
1508@kindex --default-imported-symver
1509@item --default-imported-symver
1510Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1511imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1512
252b5132
RH
1513@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1514@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1515Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1516files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1517been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1518This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1519errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1520have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1521inappropriate.
1522
fe7929ce
AM
1523@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1524@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1525Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1526library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1527
252b5132
RH
1528@kindex --no-whole-archive
1529@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1530Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1531archive files.
1532
1533@cindex output file after errors
1534@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1535@item --noinhibit-exec
1536Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1537Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1538errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1539when it issues any error whatsoever.
1540
0a9c1c8e
CD
1541@kindex -nostdlib
1542@item -nostdlib
1543Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1544command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1545(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1546
252b5132 1547@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1548@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1549@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1550@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1551file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1552@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1553object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1554object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1555should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1556usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1557name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1558list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1559command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1560this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1561@end ifclear
1562
36af4a4e
JJ
1563@kindex -pie
1564@kindex --pic-executable
1565@item -pie
1566@itemx --pic-executable
1567@cindex position independent executables
1568Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1569ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1570libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1571address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1572normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1573defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1574
252b5132
RH
1575@kindex -qmagic
1576@item -qmagic
1577This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1578
1579@kindex -Qy
1580@item -Qy
1581This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1582
1583@kindex --relax
1584@cindex synthesizing linker
1585@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1586@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1587@item --relax
28d5f677 1588@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1589An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1590@ifset GENERIC
1591This option is only supported on a few targets.
1592@end ifset
1593@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1594@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1595@end ifset
1596@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1597@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1598@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1599@ifset XTENSA
1600@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1601@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1602@ifset M68HC11
1603@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1604@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1605@ifset POWERPC
1606@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1607@end ifset
252b5132 1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1610global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1611addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1612synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1613instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1614
1615On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1616debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1617@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1618This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1619family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1620@end ifset
1621
1622@ifset GENERIC
1623On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1624but ignored.
1625@end ifset
1626
28d5f677
NC
1627On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1628@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1629
252b5132
RH
1630@cindex retaining specified symbols
1631@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1632@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1633@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1634@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1635Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1636discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1637symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1638@ifset GENERIC
1639(such as VxWorks)
1640@end ifset
1641where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1642run-time memory.
1643
1644@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1645or symbols needed for relocations.
1646
1647You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1648line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1649
1650@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1651@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1652@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1653@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1654Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1655linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1656arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1657them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1658also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1659objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1660@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1661ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1662@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1663
ff5dcc92 1664The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1665SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1666@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1667runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1668options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1669gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1670file systems.
252b5132 1671
ff5dcc92 1672For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1673followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1674the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1675@end ifset
1676
1677@ifset GENERIC
1678@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1679@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1680@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1681When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1682happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1683of the input files.
1684
1685When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1686non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1687shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1688explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1689specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1690@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1691either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1692appearing multiple times.
1693
28c309a2
NC
1694This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1695that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1696is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1697runtime linker would do.
1698
252b5132 1699The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1700libraries:
252b5132
RH
1701@enumerate
1702@item
ff5dcc92 1703Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1704@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1705Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1706between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1707specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1708used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1709at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1710by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1711the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1712@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1713On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1714@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1715environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1716@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1717On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1718directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1719@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1720For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1721variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1722@item
ec4eb78a
L
1723For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1724@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1725libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1726@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1727@item
252b5132
RH
1728The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1729@item
1730For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1731exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1732@end enumerate
1733
1734If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1735warning and continue with the link.
1736@end ifset
1737
1738@kindex -shared
1739@kindex -Bshareable
1740@item -shared
1741@itemx -Bshareable
1742@cindex shared libraries
1743Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1744and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1745shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1746undefined symbols in the link.
1747
252b5132 1748@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1749@item --sort-common
1750@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1751@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1752This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1753ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1754sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1755eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1756between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1757specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1758
2509a395
SL
1759@kindex --sort-section=name
1760@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1761This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1762patterns in the linker script.
1763
2509a395
SL
1764@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1765@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1766This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1767patterns in the linker script.
1768
252b5132 1769@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1770@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1771Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1772each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1773size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1774
1775@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1776@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1777Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1778output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1779This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1780certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1781cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1782that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1783support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1784input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1785more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1786many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1787
1788@kindex --stats
1789@item --stats
1790Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1791as execution time and memory usage.
1792
2509a395 1793@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1794@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1795Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1796configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1797that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1798
252b5132
RH
1799@kindex --traditional-format
1800@cindex traditional format
1801@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1802For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1803the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1804use the traditional format instead.
1805
1806@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1807For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1808symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1809full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1810@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1811trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1812combine duplicate entries.
1813
2509a395
SL
1814@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1815@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1816Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1817address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1818times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1819line.
1820@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1821for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1822@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1823should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1824sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1825
2509a395
SL
1826@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1827@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1828@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1829@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1830@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1831@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1832@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1833Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1834@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1835
2509a395
SL
1836@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1837@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1838@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1839When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1840of the first byte of the text segment.
1841
9d5777a3
RM
1842@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1843@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1844@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1845When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1846the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1847text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1848
0d705e9f
AM
1849@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1850@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1851@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1852When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1853model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1854
560e09e9
NC
1855@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1856@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1857Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1858values for @samp{method}:
1859
1860@table @samp
1861@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1862Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1863
1864@item report-all
da8bce14 1865Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1866
1867@item ignore-in-object-files
1868Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1869ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1870
1871@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1872Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1873ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1874when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1875libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1876command line.
1877@end table
1878
1879The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1880by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1881
1882Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1883unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1884can change this to a warning.
1885
1715a13c
L
1886@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1887@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1888@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1889@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1890Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1891supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1892the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1893argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1894
1895@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1896@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1897@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1898Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1899used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1900about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1901is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1902see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1903use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1904symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1905@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1906
7ce691ae 1907@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1908@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1909@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1910@item --warn-common
1911Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1912a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1913but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1914you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1915Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1916warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1917
1918There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1919
1920@table @samp
1921@item int i = 1;
1922A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1923file.
1924
1925@item extern int i;
1926An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1927There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1928variable somewhere.
1929
1930@item int i;
1931A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1932variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1933The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1934single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1935size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1936a definition of the same variable.
1937@end table
1938
1939The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1940Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1941just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1942encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1943a common symbol.
1944
1945@enumerate
1946@item
1947Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1948definition for the symbol.
1949@smallexample
1950@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1951 overridden by definition
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1953@end smallexample
1954
1955@item
1956Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1957the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1958except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1959@smallexample
1960@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1961 overriding common
1962@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1963@end smallexample
1964
1965@item
1966Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1967@smallexample
1968@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1969 of `@var{symbol}'
1970@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1971@end smallexample
1972
1973@item
1974Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1975@smallexample
1976@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1977 overridden by larger common
1978@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1979@end smallexample
1980
1981@item
1982Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1983the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1984encountered in a different order.
1985@smallexample
1986@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1987 overriding smaller common
1988@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1989@end smallexample
1990@end enumerate
1991
1992@kindex --warn-constructors
1993@item --warn-constructors
1994Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1995object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1996detect the use of global constructors.
1997
1998@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1999@item --warn-multiple-gp
2000Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2001This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2002Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2003section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2004of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2005base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2006base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2007bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2008large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2009values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2010option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2011
2012@kindex --warn-once
2013@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2014@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2015@item --warn-once
2016Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2017which refers to it.
2018
2019@kindex --warn-section-align
2020@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2021@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2022@item --warn-section-align
2023Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2024alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2025The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2026is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2027the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2028
8fdd7217
NC
2029@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2030@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2031Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2032
a0c402a5
L
2033@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2034@item --warn-alternate-em
2035Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2036
560e09e9
NC
2037@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2038@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2039If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2040@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2041This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2042
2043@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2044@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2045This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2046it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2047
252b5132
RH
2048@kindex --whole-archive
2049@cindex including an entire archive
2050@item --whole-archive
2051For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2052@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2053in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2054files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2055library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2056library. This option may be used more than once.
2057
7ec229ce 2058Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2059about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2060Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2061list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2062your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2063
2509a395
SL
2064@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2065@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2066Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2067@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2068undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2069@var{symbol}.
2070
2071This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2072wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2073wishes to call the system function, it should call
2074@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2075
2076Here is a trivial example:
2077
2078@smallexample
2079void *
cc2f008e 2080__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2081@{
cc2f008e 2082 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2083 return __real_malloc (c);
2084@}
2085@end smallexample
2086
ff5dcc92 2087If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2088all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2089instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2090call the real @code{malloc} function.
2091
2092You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2093links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2094you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2095file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2096call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2097
6aa29e7b
JJ
2098@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2099@item --eh-frame-hdr
2100Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2101@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2102
e41b3a13
JJ
2103@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2104@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2105Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2106generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2107if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2108
6c1439be
L
2109@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2110@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2111@item --enable-new-dtags
2112@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2113This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2114systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2115@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2116If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2117created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2118those options are only available for ELF systems.
2119
2d643429 2120@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2121@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2122Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2123close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2124time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2125increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2126value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2127
fdc90cb4
JJ
2128@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2129@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2130Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2131@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2132new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2133the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2134hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2135
35835446
JR
2136@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2137@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2138This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2139linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2140for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2141about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2142
4f9c04f7 2143Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21441021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2145run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2146has been used.
2147
2148The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2149enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2150
c0065db7
RM
2151@kindex --build-id
2152@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2153@item --build-id
2154@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2155Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2156The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2157file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2158@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2159parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2160@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2161@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2162an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2163characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2164omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2165
2166The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2167that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2168unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2169to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2170file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2171string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2172
2173Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2174@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2175@end table
2176
0285c67d
NC
2177@c man end
2178
36f63dca 2179@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2180
0285c67d
NC
2181@c man begin OPTIONS
2182
ff5dcc92 2183The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2184the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2185normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2186use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2187@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2188like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2189symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2190object file).
2191
2192In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2193support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2194PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2195values by either a space or an equals sign.
2196
ff5dcc92 2197@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2198
2199@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2200@item --add-stdcall-alias
2201If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2202as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2203[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2204
2205@kindex --base-file
2206@item --base-file @var{file}
2207Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2208addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2209@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2210[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2211
2212@kindex --dll
2213@item --dll
2214Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2215@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2216file.
bb10df36 2217[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2218
88183869
DK
2219@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2220@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2221@item --enable-long-section-names
2222@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2223The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2224the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2225for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2226fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2227to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2228allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2229disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2230generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2231as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2232with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2233GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2234information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2235option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2236section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2237when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2238image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2239[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2240
252b5132
RH
2241@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2242@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2243@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2244@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2245If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2246do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2247only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2248resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2249undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2250@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2251to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2252warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2253import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2254to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2255feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2256@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2257mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2258[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2259
522f09cd
KT
2260@kindex --leading-underscore
2261@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2262@item --leading-underscore
2263@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2264For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2265in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2266disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2267
252b5132
RH
2268@cindex DLLs, creating
2269@kindex --export-all-symbols
2270@item --export-all-symbols
2271If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2272be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2273otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2274explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2275attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2276option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2277@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2278@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2279exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2280re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2281such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2282@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2283@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2284Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2285not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2286extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2287(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2288These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2289@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2290@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2291@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2292@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2293[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2294
2295@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2296@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2297Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2298exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2299[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2300
2927aaca
NC
2301@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2302@item --exclude-all-symbols
2303Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2304[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2305
252b5132
RH
2306@kindex --file-alignment
2307@item --file-alignment
2308Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2309file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2310512.
bb10df36 2311[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2312
2313@cindex heap size
2314@kindex --heap
2315@item --heap @var{reserve}
2316@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2317Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2318to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2319committed.
bb10df36 2320[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2321
2322@cindex image base
2323@kindex --image-base
2324@item --image-base @var{value}
2325Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2326the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2327is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2328your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2329other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2330for dlls.
bb10df36 2331[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2332
2333@kindex --kill-at
2334@item --kill-at
2335If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2336symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2337[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2338
26d2d8a2
BF
2339@kindex --large-address-aware
2340@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2341If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2342header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2343greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2344or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2345section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2346[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2347
252b5132
RH
2348@kindex --major-image-version
2349@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2350Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2351[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2352
2353@kindex --major-os-version
2354@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2355Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2356[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2357
2358@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2359@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2360Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2361[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2362
2363@kindex --minor-image-version
2364@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2365Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2366[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2367
2368@kindex --minor-os-version
2369@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2370Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2371[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2372
2373@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2374@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2375Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2377
2378@cindex DEF files, creating
2379@cindex DLLs, creating
2380@kindex --output-def
2381@item --output-def @var{file}
2382The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2383file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2384(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2385library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2386automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2388
b044cda1
CW
2389@cindex DLLs, creating
2390@kindex --out-implib
2391@item --out-implib @var{file}
2392The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2393import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2394import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2395may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2396makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2397creation step.
bb10df36 2398[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2399
2400@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2401@item --enable-auto-image-base
2402Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2403using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2404from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2405collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2406avoided.
bb10df36 2407[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2408
2409@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2410@item --disable-auto-image-base
2411Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2412user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2413default.
bb10df36 2414[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2415
2416@cindex DLLs, linking to
2417@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2418@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2419When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2420search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2421@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2422between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2423uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2424@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2425[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2426
2427@kindex --enable-auto-import
2428@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2429Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2430DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2431building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2432'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2433to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2434specification published by Microsoft.
2435
e2a83dd0
NC
2436Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2437data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2438placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2439around a problem with consts that is described here:
2440http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2441
4d8907ac
DS
2442Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2443see this message:
0d888aac 2444
ece2d90e 2445"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2446documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2447
ece2d90e
NC
2448This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2449ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2450allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2451fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2452constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2453multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2454this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2455of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2456the warning, and exit.
2457
2458There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2459data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2460
2fa9fc65
NC
2461One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2462of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2463this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2464
c0065db7
RM
2465A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2466that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2467there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2468a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2469
2470@example
2471extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2472extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2473 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2474@end example
2475
2476or
2477
2478@example
2479extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2480extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2481 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2482@end example
2483
c0065db7 2484For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2485is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2486
2487@example
2488extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2489extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2490 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2491@end example
2492
c406afaf
NC
2493or
2494
2495@example
2496extern long long extern_ll;
2497extern_ll -->
2498 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2499@end example
2500
2fa9fc65 2501A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2502'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2503@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2504requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2505building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2506merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2507between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2508constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2509
2510Original:
2511@example
2512--foo.h
2513extern int arr[];
2514--foo.c
2515#include "foo.h"
2516void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2517 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2518@}
2519@end example
2520
2521Solution 1:
2522@example
2523--foo.h
2524extern int arr[];
2525--foo.c
2526#include "foo.h"
2527void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2528 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2529 volatile int *parr = arr;
2530 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2531@}
2532@end example
2533
2534Solution 2:
2535@example
2536--foo.h
2537/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2538#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2539 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2540#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2541#else
2542#define FOO_IMPORT
2543#endif
2544extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2545--foo.c
2546#include "foo.h"
2547void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2548 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2549@}
2550@end example
2551
c0065db7 2552A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2553library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2554for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2555functions).
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2557
2558@kindex --disable-auto-import
2559@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2560Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2561@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2563
2fa9fc65
NC
2564@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2565@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2566If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2567that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2568a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2569environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2570[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2571
2572@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2573@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2574Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2575DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2576[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2577
b044cda1
CW
2578@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2579@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2580Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2581[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2582
252b5132
RH
2583@kindex --section-alignment
2584@item --section-alignment
2585Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2586addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2587[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2588
2589@cindex stack size
2590@kindex --stack
2591@item --stack @var{reserve}
2592@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2593Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2594to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2595committed.
bb10df36 2596[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2597
2598@kindex --subsystem
2599@item --subsystem @var{which}
2600@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2601@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2602Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2603legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2604@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2605the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2606@var{which}.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2608
2f563b51
DK
2609The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2610of the PE file header:
2611[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2612
2613@kindex --dynamicbase
2614@item --dynamicbase
2615The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2616randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2617Vista for i386 PE targets.
2618
2619@kindex --forceinteg
2620@item --forceinteg
2621Code integrity checks are enforced.
2622
2623@kindex --nxcompat
2624@item --nxcompat
2625The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2626This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2627
2628@kindex --no-isolation
2629@item --no-isolation
2630Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2631
2632@kindex --no-seh
2633@item --no-seh
2634The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2635this image.
2636
2637@kindex --no-bind
2638@item --no-bind
2639Do not bind this image.
2640
2641@kindex --wdmdriver
2642@item --wdmdriver
2643The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2644
2f563b51
DK
2645@kindex --tsaware
2646@item --tsaware
2647The image is Terminal Server aware.
2648
252b5132
RH
2649@end table
2650
0285c67d
NC
2651@c man end
2652
ac145307
BS
2653@ifset C6X
2654@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2655
2656@c man begin OPTIONS
2657
2658The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2659libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2660all executables use an index of 0.
2661
2662@table @gcctabopt
2663
2664@kindex --dsbt-size
2665@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2666This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2667or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2668entries.
2669
2670@kindex --dsbt-index
2671@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2672This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2673to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2674executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2675@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2676
fbd9ad90
PB
2677@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2678The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2679exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2680
ac145307
BS
2681@end table
2682
2683@c man end
2684@end ifset
2685
93fd0973
SC
2686@ifset M68HC11
2687@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2688
2689@c man begin OPTIONS
2690
2691The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2692memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2693
2694@table @gcctabopt
2695
2696@kindex --no-trampoline
2697@item --no-trampoline
2698This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2699is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2700instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2701
2702@kindex --bank-window
2703@item --bank-window @var{name}
2704This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2705the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2706The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2707paging and addresses within the memory window.
2708
2709@end table
2710
2711@c man end
2712@end ifset
2713
7fb9f789
NC
2714@ifset M68K
2715@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2716
2717@c man begin OPTIONS
2718
2719The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2720when linking for 68K targets.
2721
2722@table @gcctabopt
2723
2724@kindex --got
2725@item --got=@var{type}
2726This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2727@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2728@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2729Info entry for @file{ld}.
2730
2731@end table
2732
2733@c man end
2734@end ifset
2735
252b5132
RH
2736@ifset UsesEnvVars
2737@node Environment
2738@section Environment Variables
2739
0285c67d
NC
2740@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2741
560e09e9 2742You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2743@ifclear SingleFormat
2744@code{GNUTARGET},
2745@end ifclear
2746@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2747
36f63dca 2748@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2749@kindex GNUTARGET
2750@cindex default input format
2751@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2752use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2753of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2754@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2755of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2756attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2757this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2758there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2759object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2760BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2761in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2762@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2763
2764@kindex LDEMULATION
2765@cindex default emulation
2766@cindex emulation, default
2767@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2768@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2769behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2770available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2771the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2772variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2773linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2774
2775@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2776@cindex demangling, default
2777Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2778@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2779default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2780a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2781may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2782options.
2783
0285c67d
NC
2784@c man end
2785@end ifset
2786
252b5132
RH
2787@node Scripts
2788@chapter Linker Scripts
2789
2790@cindex scripts
2791@cindex linker scripts
2792@cindex command files
2793Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2794written in the linker command language.
2795
2796The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2797the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2798the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2799more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2800direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2801described below.
2802
2803The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2804yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2805linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2806to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2807such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2808
2809You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2810line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2811default linker script.
2812
2813You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2814to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2815Linker Scripts}.
2816
2817@menu
2818* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2819* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2820* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2821* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2822* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2823* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2824* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2825* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2826* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2827* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2828* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2829@end menu
2830
2831@node Basic Script Concepts
2832@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2833@cindex linker script concepts
2834We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2835describe the linker script language.
2836
2837The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2838file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2839@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2840The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2841purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2842among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2843section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2844in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2845
2846Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2847also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2848contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2849the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2850A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2851area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2852loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2853which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2854of debugging information.
2855
2856Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2857first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2858the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2859@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2860section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2861same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2862is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2863(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2864based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2865RAM address would be the VMA.
2866
2867You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2868program with the @samp{-h} option.
2869
2870Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2871@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2872has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2873information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2874will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2875static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2876referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2877
2878You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2879program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2880option.
2881
2882@node Script Format
2883@section Linker Script Format
2884@cindex linker script format
2885Linker scripts are text files.
2886
2887You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2888either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2889symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2890generally ignored.
2891
2892Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2893If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2894otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2895double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2896file name.
2897
2898You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2899@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2900to whitespace.
2901
2902@node Simple Example
2903@section Simple Linker Script Example
2904@cindex linker script example
2905@cindex example of linker script
2906Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2907
2908The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2909@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2910memory layout of the output file.
2911
2912The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2913describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2914code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2915@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2916Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2917your input files.
2918
2919For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29200x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2921linker script which will do that:
2922@smallexample
2923SECTIONS
2924@{
2925 . = 0x10000;
2926 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2927 . = 0x8000000;
2928 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2929 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2930@}
2931@end smallexample
2932
2933You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2934followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2935descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2936
252b5132
RH
2937The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2938sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2939counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2940other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2941current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2942incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2943@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2944
2945The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2946required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2947after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2948which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2949wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2950means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2951
2952Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2953@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2954@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2955
2956The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2957the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2958at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2959output section, the value of the location counter will be
2960@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2961effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2962immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2963
2964The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2965alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2966example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2967sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2968may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2969sections.
2970
2971That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2972
2973@node Simple Commands
2974@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2975@cindex linker script simple commands
2976In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2977
2978@menu
2979* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2980* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2981@ifclear SingleFormat
2982* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2983@end ifclear
2984
4a93e180 2985* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2986* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2987@end menu
2988
2989@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2990@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2991@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2992@cindex start of execution
2993@cindex first instruction
2994@cindex entry point
2995The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2996point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2997entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2998@smallexample
2999ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3000@end smallexample
3001
3002There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3003entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3004stopping when one of them succeeds:
3005@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3006@item
252b5132 3007the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3008@item
252b5132 3009the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3010@item
3ab904c4
NC
3011the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3012targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3013check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3014@item
252b5132 3015the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3016@item
252b5132
RH
3017The address @code{0}.
3018@end itemize
3019
3020@node File Commands
36f63dca 3021@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3022@cindex linker script file commands
3023Several linker script commands deal with files.
3024
3025@table @code
3026@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3027@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3028@cindex including a linker script
3029Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3030be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3031with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
303210 levels deep.
3033
4006703d
NS
3034You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3035@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3036
252b5132
RH
3037@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3038@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3039@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3040@cindex input files in linker scripts
3041@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3042@cindex linker script input object files
3043The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3044in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3045
3046For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3047a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3048then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3049
3050In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3051script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3052
e3f2db7f
AO
3053In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3054with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3055located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3056for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3057open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3058linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3059description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3060
ff5dcc92 3061If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3062name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3063@samp{-l}.
3064
3065When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3066files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3067script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3068
3069@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3070@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3071@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3072@cindex grouping input files
3073The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3074files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3075new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3076in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3077
b717d30e
JJ
3078@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3079@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3080@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3081This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3082commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3083as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3084with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3085when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3086@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3087and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3088setting afterwards.
3089
252b5132
RH
3090@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3091@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3092@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3093The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3094@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3095@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3096Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3097precedence.
3098
3099You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3100output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3101
3102@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3103@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3104@cindex library search path in linker script
3105@cindex archive search path in linker script
3106@cindex search path in linker script
3107The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3108@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3109@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3110on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3111are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3112the command line option are searched first.
3113
3114@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3115@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3116@cindex first input file
3117The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3118that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3119though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3120when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3121first file.
3122@end table
3123
3124@ifclear SingleFormat
3125@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3126@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3127A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3128
3129@table @code
3130@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3131@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3132@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3133@cindex output file format in linker script
3134The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3135output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3136exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3137(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3138line option takes precedence.
3139
3140You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3141formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3142This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3143desired endianness.
3144
3145If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3146will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3147output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3148used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3149
3150For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3151command:
3152@smallexample
3153OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3154@end smallexample
3155This says that the default format for the output file is
3156@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3157option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3158format.
3159
3160@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3161@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3162@cindex input file format in linker script
3163The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3164files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3165This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3166(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3167is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3168command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3169@end table
3170@end ifclear
3171
4a93e180
NC
3172@node REGION_ALIAS
3173@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3174@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3175@cindex region alias
3176@cindex region names
3177
3178Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3179@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3180
3181@smallexample
3182REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3183@end smallexample
3184
3185The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3186memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3187to memory regions. An example follows.
3188
3189Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3190memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3191that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3192non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3193access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3194read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3195sections:
3196
3197@itemize @bullet
3198@item
3199@code{.text} program code;
3200@item
3201@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3202@item
3203@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3204@item
3205@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3206@end itemize
3207
3208The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3209part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3210output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3211systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3212@code{C}:
3213@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3214@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3215@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3216@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3217@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3218@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3219@end multitable
3220The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3221loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3222the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3223the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3224
3225The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3226includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3227memory layout:
3228@smallexample
3229INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3230
3231SECTIONS
3232 @{
3233 .text :
3234 @{
3235 *(.text)
3236 @} > REGION_TEXT
3237 .rodata :
3238 @{
3239 *(.rodata)
3240 rodata_end = .;
3241 @} > REGION_RODATA
3242 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3243 @{
3244 data_start = .;
3245 *(.data)
3246 @} > REGION_DATA
3247 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3248 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3249 .bss :
3250 @{
3251 *(.bss)
3252 @} > REGION_BSS
3253 @}
3254@end smallexample
3255
3256Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3257regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3258variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3259@table @code
3260@item A
3261Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3262@smallexample
3263MEMORY
3264 @{
3265 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3266 @}
3267
3268REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3269REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3270REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3271REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3272@end smallexample
3273@item B
3274Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3275into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3276@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3277@smallexample
3278MEMORY
3279 @{
3280 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3281 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3282 @}
3283
3284REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3285REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3286REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3287REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3288@end smallexample
3289@item C
3290Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3291@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3292initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3293system start into the @code{RAM}.
3294@smallexample
3295MEMORY
3296 @{
3297 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3298 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3299 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3300 @}
3301
3302REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3303REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3304REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3305REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3306@end smallexample
3307@end table
3308
3309It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3310@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3311necessary:
3312@smallexample
3313#include <string.h>
3314
3315extern char data_start [];
3316extern char data_size [];
3317extern char data_load_start [];
3318
3319void copy_data(void)
3320@{
3321 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3322 @{
3323 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3324 @}
3325@}
3326@end smallexample
3327
252b5132 3328@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3329@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3330There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3331
3332@table @code
3333@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3334@kindex ASSERT
3335@cindex assertion in linker script
3336Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3337with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3338
3339@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3340@kindex EXTERN
3341@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3342Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3343symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3344modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3345each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3346command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3347
3348@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3349@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3350@cindex common allocation in linker script
3351This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3352to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3353output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3354
4818e05f
AM
3355@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3356@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3357@cindex common allocation in linker script
3358This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3359command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3360to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3361
53d25da6
AM
3362@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3363@kindex INSERT
3364@cindex insert user script into default script
3365This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3366augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3367inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3368@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3369default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3370sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3371linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3372insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3373linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3374default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3375of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3376to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3377is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3378
3379@smallexample
3380SECTIONS
3381@{
3382 OVERLAY :
3383 @{
3384 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3385 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3386 @}
3387@}
3388INSERT AFTER .text;
3389@end smallexample
3390
252b5132
RH
3391@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3392@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3393@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3394This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3395references among certain output sections.
3396
3397In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3398using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3399will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3400errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3401a function defined in the other section.
3402
3403The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3404@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3405an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3406@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3407names.
3408
3409@ifclear SingleFormat
3410@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3411@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3412@cindex machine architecture
3413@cindex architecture
3414Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3415of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3416architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3417the @samp{-f} option.
3418@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3419
3420@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3421@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3422This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3423@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3424in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3425@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3426@end table
3427
3428@node Assignments
3429@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3430@cindex assignment in scripts
3431@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3432@cindex variables, defining
3433You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3434the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3435
3436@menu
3437* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3438* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3439* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3440* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3441* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3442@end menu
3443
3444@node Simple Assignments
3445@subsection Simple Assignments
3446
3447You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3448
3449@table @code
3450@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3451@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3452@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3453@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3454@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3455@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3456@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3457@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3458@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3459@end table
3460
3461The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3462@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3463defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3464
3465The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3466may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3467
3468The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3469
3470Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3471
3472You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3473statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3474section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3475
3476The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3477expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3478
3479Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3480assignments may be used:
3481
3482@smallexample
3483floating_point = 0;
3484SECTIONS
3485@{
3486 .text :
3487 @{
3488 *(.text)
3489 _etext = .;
3490 @}
156e34dd 3491 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3492 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3493@}
3494@end smallexample
3495@noindent
3496In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3497zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3498the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3499defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3500upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3501
eb8476a6
MR
3502@node HIDDEN
3503@subsection HIDDEN
3504@cindex HIDDEN
3505For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3506exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3507
3508Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3509@code{HIDDEN}:
3510
3511@smallexample
3512HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3513SECTIONS
3514@{
3515 .text :
3516 @{
3517 *(.text)
3518 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3519 @}
3520 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3521 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3522@}
3523@end smallexample
3524@noindent
3525In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3526
252b5132
RH
3527@node PROVIDE
3528@subsection PROVIDE
3529@cindex PROVIDE
3530In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3531only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3532the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3533@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3534@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3535@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3536@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3537@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3538
3539Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3540@smallexample
3541SECTIONS
3542@{
3543 .text :
3544 @{
3545 *(.text)
3546 _etext = .;
3547 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3548 @}
3549@}
3550@end smallexample
3551
3552In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3553underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3554the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3555underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3556If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3557linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3558
7af8e998
L
3559@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3560@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3561@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3562Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3563hidden and won't be exported.
3564
73ae6183
NC
3565@node Source Code Reference
3566@subsection Source Code Reference
3567
3568Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3569intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3570a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3571symbol that does not have a value.
3572
3573Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3574transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3575stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3576prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3577mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3578of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3579variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3580linker script variable might be referred to as:
3581
3582@smallexample
3583 extern int foo;
3584@end smallexample
3585
3586But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3587
3588@smallexample
3589 _foo = 1000;
3590@end smallexample
3591
3592In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3593transformation has taken place.
3594
3595When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3596things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3597in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3598second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3599table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3600contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3601value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3602
3603@smallexample
3604 int foo = 1000;
3605@end smallexample
3606
3607creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3608holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3609number 1000 is initially stored.
3610
3611When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3612first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3613memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3614So:
3615
3616@smallexample
3617 foo = 1;
3618@end smallexample
3619
3620looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3621associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3622address. Whereas:
3623
3624@smallexample
3625 int * a = & foo;
3626@end smallexample
3627
3628looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3629and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3630the variable @samp{a}.
3631
3632Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3633the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3634an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3635
3636@smallexample
3637 foo = 1000;
3638@end smallexample
3639
3640creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3641the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3642address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3643linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3644access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3645
3646Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3647you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3648use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3649section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3650linker script contains these declarations:
3651
3652@smallexample
3653@group
3654 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3655 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3656 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3657@end group
3658@end smallexample
3659
3660Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3661
3662@smallexample
3663@group
3664 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3665
73ae6183
NC
3666 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3667@end group
3668@end smallexample
3669
3670Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3671
252b5132 3672@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3673@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3674@kindex SECTIONS
3675The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3676into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3677
3678The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3679@smallexample
3680SECTIONS
3681@{
3682 @var{sections-command}
3683 @var{sections-command}
3684 @dots{}
3685@}
3686@end smallexample
3687
3688Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3689
3690@itemize @bullet
3691@item
3692an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3693@item
3694a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3695@item
3696an output section description
3697@item
3698an overlay description
3699@end itemize
3700
3701The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3702@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3703those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3704understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3705the layout of the output file.
3706
3707Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3708below.
3709
3710If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3711linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3712section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3713input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3714example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3715in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3716
3717@menu
3718* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3719* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3720* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3721* Input Section:: Input section description
3722* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3723* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3724* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3725* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3726* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3727@end menu
3728
3729@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3730@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3731The full description of an output section looks like this:
3732@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3733@group
7e7d5768 3734@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3735 [AT(@var{lma})]
3736 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3737 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3738 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3739 @{
3740 @var{output-section-command}
3741 @var{output-section-command}
3742 @dots{}
562d3460 3743 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3744@end group
3745@end smallexample
3746
3747Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3748
3749The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3750name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3751The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3752
3753Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3754
3755@itemize @bullet
3756@item
3757a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3758@item
3759an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3760@item
3761data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3762@item
3763a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3764@end itemize
3765
3766@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3767@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3768@cindex name, section
3769@cindex section name
3770The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3771meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3772support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3773must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3774example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3775output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3776names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3777quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3778characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3779commas must be quoted.
3780
3781The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3782Discarding}.
3783
3784@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3785@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3786@cindex address, section
3787@cindex section address
3788The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3789address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3790is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3791
3792If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3793section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3794to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3795alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3796contained within the output section.
3797
3798The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3799
3800@itemize @bullet
3801@item
3802If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3803is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3804in that region.
3805
3806@item
3807If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3808regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3809section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3810be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3811
3812@item
3813If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3814the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3815counter.
3816@end itemize
3817
3818@noindent
3819For example:
3820
252b5132
RH
3821@smallexample
3822.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3823@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3824
252b5132
RH
3825@noindent
3826and
ea5cae92 3827
252b5132
RH
3828@smallexample
3829.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3830@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3831
252b5132
RH
3832@noindent
3833are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3834@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3835counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3836counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3837input sections.
252b5132
RH
3838
3839The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3840For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3841so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3842do something like this:
3843@smallexample
3844.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3845@end smallexample
3846@noindent
3847This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3848aligned upward to the specified value.
3849
3850Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3851location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3852sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3853
3854@node Input Section
36f63dca 3855@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3856@cindex input sections
3857@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3858The most common output section command is an input section description.
3859
3860The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3861You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3862in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3863map the input files into your memory layout.
3864
3865@menu
3866* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3867* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3868* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3869* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3870* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3871@end menu
3872
3873@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3874@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3875@cindex input section basics
3876An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3877by a list of section names in parentheses.
3878
3879The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3880describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3881
3882The most common input section description is to include all input
3883sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3884include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3885@smallexample
3886*(.text)
3887@end smallexample
3888@noindent
18625d54
CM
3889Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3890of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3891match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3892example:
252b5132 3893@smallexample
b4346c09 3894*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3895@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3896will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3897@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3898
3899There are two ways to include more than one section:
3900@smallexample
3901*(.text .rdata)
3902*(.text) *(.rdata)
3903@end smallexample
3904@noindent
3905The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3906@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3907first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3908they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3909@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3910@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3911
3912You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3913You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3914needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3915@smallexample
3916data.o(.data)
3917@end smallexample
3918
ae17ab41
CM
3919To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3920of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3921
3922Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3923
3924@smallexample
3925@group
3926SECTIONS @{
3927 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3928 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3929@}
3930@end group
3931@end smallexample
3932
3933In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3934input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3935@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3936@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3937whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3938
967928e9
AM
3939You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3940matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3941with no whitespace around the colon.
3942
3943@table @samp
3944@item archive:file
3945matches file within archive
3946@item archive:
3947matches the whole archive
3948@item :file
3949matches file but not one in an archive
3950@end table
3951
3952Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3953wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3954single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3955@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3956within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3957also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3958other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3959from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3960command.
3961
252b5132
RH
3962If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3963the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3964commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3965@smallexample
3966data.o
3967@end smallexample
3968
967928e9
AM
3969When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3970and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3971characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3972name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3973did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3974though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3975@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3976the archive search path.
3977
3978@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3979@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3980@cindex input section wildcards
3981@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3982@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3983@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3984In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3985name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3986
3987The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3988pattern for the file name.
3989
3990The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3991
3992@table @samp
3993@item *
3994matches any number of characters
3995@item ?
3996matches any single character
3997@item [@var{chars}]
3998matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3999character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4000@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4001@item \
4002quotes the following character
4003@end table
4004
4005When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4006will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4007Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4008exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4009@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4010a @samp{/} character.
4011
4012File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4013specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4014does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4015
4016If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4017appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4018will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4019sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4020@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4021@smallexample
4022.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4023.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4024@end smallexample
4025
bcaa7b3e 4026@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4027Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4028in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4029this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4030pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4031@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4032into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4033
bcaa7b3e
L
4034@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4035@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4036difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4037ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4038
02ecc8e9
L
4039@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4040@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4041difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4042ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4043encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4044
bcaa7b3e
L
4045@cindex SORT
4046@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4047
4048When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4049can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4050
4051@enumerate
4052@item
4053@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4054It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4055sections have the same name.
4056@item
4057@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4058It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4059sections have the same alignment.
4060@item
c0065db7 4061@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4062treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4063@item
4064@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4065is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4066@item
4067All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4068@end enumerate
4069
4070When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4071section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4072takes precedence over the command line option.
4073
4074If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4075command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4076treated as nested sorting command.
4077
4078@enumerate
4079@item
4080@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4081@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4082@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4083@item
4084@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4085@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4086@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4087@end enumerate
4088
4089If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4090command line option will be ignored.
4091
eda680f8
L
4092@cindex SORT_NONE
4093@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4094section sorting option.
4095
252b5132
RH
4096If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4097@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4098precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4099
4100This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4101files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4102sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4103The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4104with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4105linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4106@smallexample
4107@group
4108SECTIONS @{
4109 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4110 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4111 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4112 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4113@}
4114@end group
4115@end smallexample
4116
4117@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4118@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4119@cindex common symbol placement
4120@cindex uninitialized data placement
4121A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4122file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4123linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4124named @samp{COMMON}.
4125
4126You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4127other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4128particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4129input files are placed in another section.
4130
4131In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4132@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4133@smallexample
4134.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4135@end smallexample
4136
4137@cindex scommon section
4138@cindex small common symbols
4139Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4140example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4141symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4142different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4143the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4144symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4145to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4146locations.
4147
4148@cindex [COMMON]
4149You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4150notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4151@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4152
4153@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4154@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4155@cindex KEEP
4156@cindex garbage collection
4157When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4158it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4159This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4160with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4161@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4162
4163@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4164@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4165The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4166to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4167start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4168@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4169follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4170@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4171@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4172All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4173files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4174
4175@smallexample
4176@group
4177SECTIONS @{
4178 outputa 0x10000 :
4179 @{
4180 all.o
4181 foo.o (.input1)
4182 @}
36f63dca
NC
4183@end group
4184@group
252b5132
RH
4185 outputb :
4186 @{
4187 foo.o (.input2)
4188 foo1.o (.input1)
4189 @}
36f63dca
NC
4190@end group
4191@group
252b5132
RH
4192 outputc :
4193 @{
4194 *(.input1)
4195 *(.input2)
4196 @}
4197@}
4198@end group
a1ab1d2a 4199@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4200
4201@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4202@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4203@cindex data
4204@cindex section data
4205@cindex output section data
4206@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4207@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4208@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4209@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4210@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4211You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4212@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4213an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4214parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4215value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4216counter.
4217
4218The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4219store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4220bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4221stored.
4222
4223For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4224of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4225@smallexample
4226BYTE(1)
4227LONG(addr)
4228@end smallexample
4229
4230When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4231same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4232target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4233@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4234@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4235
4236If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4237which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4238When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4239true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4240endianness of the first input object file.
4241
36f63dca 4242Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4243between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4244@smallexample
4245SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4246@end smallexample
4247whereas this will work:
4248@smallexample
4249SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4250@end smallexample
4251
252b5132
RH
4252@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4253@cindex holes, filling
4254@cindex unspecified memory
4255You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4256current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4257otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4258gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4259with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4260necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4261point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4262than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4263different parts of an output section.
4264
4265This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4266value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4267@smallexample
563e308f 4268FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4269@end smallexample
4270
4271The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4272section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4273part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4274entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4275precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4276expression.
252b5132
RH
4277
4278@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4279@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4280There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4281commands.
4282
4283@table @code
4284@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4285@cindex input filename symbols
4286@cindex filename symbols
4287@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4288The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4289The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4290file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4291the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4292
4293This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4294normally used for any other object file format.
4295
4296@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4297@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4298@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4299@item CONSTRUCTORS
4300When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4301unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4302destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4303arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4304automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4305For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4306linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4307@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4308ignored for other object file formats.
4309
4310The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4311constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4312Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4313the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4314first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4315of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4316compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4317formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4318@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4319the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4320destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4321@code{exit}.
4322
4323For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4324arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4325addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4326and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4327linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4328runtime code expects to see.
4329
4330@smallexample
4331 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4332 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4333 *(.ctors)
4334 LONG(0)
4335 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4336 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4337 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4338 *(.dtors)
4339 LONG(0)
4340 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4341@end smallexample
4342
4343If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4344which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4345are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4346are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4347command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4348@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4349@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4350@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4351
4352Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4353and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4354need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4355scripts.
4356
4357@end table
4358
4359@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4360@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4361@cindex discarding sections
4362@cindex sections, discarding
4363@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4364The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4365for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4366be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4367@smallexample
49c13adb 4368.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4369@end smallexample
4370@noindent
4371will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4372@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4373sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4374space in an output section will also create the output section.
4375
a0976ea4 4376The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4377on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4378symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4379the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4380section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4381
4382@cindex /DISCARD/
4383The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4384input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4385section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4386
4387@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4388@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4389@cindex output section attributes
4390We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4391like this:
0c71d759 4392
252b5132 4393@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4394@group
7e7d5768 4395@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4396 [AT(@var{lma})]
4397 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4398 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4399 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4400 @{
4401 @var{output-section-command}
4402 @var{output-section-command}
4403 @dots{}
562d3460 4404 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4405@end group
4406@end smallexample
0c71d759 4407
252b5132
RH
4408We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4409@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4410remaining section attributes.
4411
a1ab1d2a 4412@menu
252b5132
RH
4413* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4414* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4415* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4416* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4417* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4418* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4419* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4420* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4421@end menu
4422
4423@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4424@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4425Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4426parentheses. The following types are defined:
4427
4428@table @code
4429@item NOLOAD
4430The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4431loaded into memory when the program is run.
4432@item DSECT
4433@itemx COPY
4434@itemx INFO
4435@itemx OVERLAY
4436These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4437rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4438marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4439section when the program is run.
4440@end table
4441
4442@kindex NOLOAD
4443@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4444@cindex loading, preventing
4445The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4446the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4447the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4448@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4449need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4450@smallexample
4451@group
4452SECTIONS @{
4453 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4454 @dots{}
4455@}
4456@end group
4457@end smallexample
4458
4459@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4460@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4461@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4462@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4463@cindex load address
4464@cindex section load address
4465Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4466@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4467@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4468specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4469address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4470
ea5cae92
NC
4471The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4472specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4473takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4474load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4475region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4476
4477If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4478section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4479load address:
4480
4481@itemize @bullet
4482@item
4483If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4484the LMA address as well.
4485
4486@item
4487If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4488
4489@item
4490Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4491with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4492section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4493VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4494the last section in the located region.
4495
4496@item
4497If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4498that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4499
4500@item
4501If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4502section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4503@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4504
4505@cindex ROM initialized data
4506@cindex initialized data in ROM
4507This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4508example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4509called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4510@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4511even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4512uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4513defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4514counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4515
4516@smallexample
4517@group
4518SECTIONS
4519 @{
4520 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4521 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4522 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4523 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4524 .bss 0x3000 :
4525 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4526@}
4527@end group
4528@end smallexample
4529
4530The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4531this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4532the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4533how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4534script.
4535
4536@smallexample
4537@group
4538extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4539char *src = &_etext;
4540char *dst = &_data;
4541
ea5cae92
NC
4542/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4543while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4544 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4545
ea5cae92 4546/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4547for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4548 *dst = 0;
4549@end group
4550@end smallexample
4551
bbf115d3
L
4552@node Forced Output Alignment
4553@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4554@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4555@cindex forcing output section alignment
4556@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4557You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4558
7e7d5768
AM
4559@node Forced Input Alignment
4560@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4561@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4562@cindex forcing input section alignment
4563@cindex input section alignment
4564You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4565SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4566sections, whether larger or smaller.
4567
0c71d759
NC
4568@node Output Section Constraint
4569@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4570@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4571@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4572@cindex constraints on output sections
4573You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4574of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4575read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4576@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4577
252b5132 4578@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4579@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4580@kindex >@var{region}
4581@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4582@cindex memory regions and sections
4583You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4584using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4585
4586Here is a simple example:
4587@smallexample
4588@group
4589MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4590SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4591@end group
4592@end smallexample
4593
4594@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4595@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4596@kindex :@var{phdr}
4597@cindex section, assigning to program header
4598@cindex program headers and sections
4599You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4600using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4601one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4602assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4603@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4604linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4605
4606Here is a simple example:
4607@smallexample
4608@group
4609PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4610SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4611@end group
4612@end smallexample
4613
4614@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4615@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4616@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4617@cindex section fill pattern
4618@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4619You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4620@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4621(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4622within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4623alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4624necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4625of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4626an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4627fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4628other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4629pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4630expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4631
4632You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4633output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4634
4635Here is a simple example:
4636@smallexample
4637@group
563e308f 4638SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4639@end group
4640@end smallexample
4641
4642@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4643@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4644@kindex OVERLAY
4645@cindex overlays
4646An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4647are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4648the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4649copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4650required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4651can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4652than another.
4653
4654Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4655@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4656output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4657command is as follows:
4658@smallexample
4659@group
4660OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4661 @{
4662 @var{secname1}
4663 @{
4664 @var{output-section-command}
4665 @var{output-section-command}
4666 @dots{}
4667 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4668 @var{secname2}
4669 @{
4670 @var{output-section-command}
4671 @var{output-section-command}
4672 @dots{}
4673 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4674 @dots{}
4675 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4676@end group
4677@end smallexample
4678
4679Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4680section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4681section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4682those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4683except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4684sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4685
4686The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4687addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4688memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4689whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4690and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4691and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4692
4693If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4694among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4695all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4696section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4697NOCROSSREFS}.
4698
4699For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4700provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4701defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4702@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4703the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4704within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4705symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4706
4707At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4708the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4709
4710Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4711@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4712@smallexample
4713@group
4714 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4715 @{
4716 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4717 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4718 @}
4719@end group
4720@end smallexample
4721@noindent
4722This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4723address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4724@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4725following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4726@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4727@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4728
4729C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4730like the following.
4731
4732@smallexample
4733@group
4734 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4735 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4736 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4737@end group
4738@end smallexample
4739
4740Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4741everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4742example could have been written identically as follows.
4743
4744@smallexample
4745@group
4746 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4747 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4748 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4749 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4750 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4751 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4752 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4753@end group
4754@end smallexample
4755
4756@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4757@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4758@kindex MEMORY
4759@cindex memory regions
4760@cindex regions of memory
4761@cindex allocating memory
4762@cindex discontinuous memory
4763The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4764memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4765
4766The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4767memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4768may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4769can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4770set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4771regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4772around to fit into the available regions.
4773
4774A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4775command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4776you wish. The syntax is:
4777@smallexample
4778@group
a1ab1d2a 4779MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4780 @{
4781 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4782 @dots{}
4783 @}
4784@end group
4785@end smallexample
4786
4787The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4788region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4789Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4790with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4791must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4792add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4793command.
252b5132
RH
4794
4795@cindex memory region attributes
4796The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4797whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4798not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4799@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4800section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4801the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4802them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4803
4804The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4805@table @samp
4806@item R
4807Read-only section
4808@item W
4809Read/write section
4810@item X
4811Executable section
4812@item A
4813Allocatable section
4814@item I
4815Initialized section
4816@item L
4817Same as @samp{I}
4818@item !
c09e9a8c 4819Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4820@end table
4821
4822If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4823@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4824attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4825in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4826attributes.
4827
4828@kindex ORIGIN =
4829@kindex o =
4830@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4831The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4832the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4833cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4834abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4835@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4836
4837@kindex LENGTH =
4838@kindex len =
4839@kindex l =
4840The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4841region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4842be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4843@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4844
4845In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4846available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4847and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4848linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4849is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4850or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4851explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4852region.
4853
4854@smallexample
4855@group
a1ab1d2a 4856MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4857 @{
4858 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4859 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4860 @}
4861@end group
4862@end smallexample
4863
4864Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4865specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4866@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4867a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4868output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4869was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4870the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4871output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4872region, the linker will issue an error message.
4873
3ec57632 4874It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4875expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4876@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4877
4878@smallexample
4879@group
c0065db7 4880 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4881@end group
4882@end smallexample
4883
252b5132
RH
4884@node PHDRS
4885@section PHDRS Command
4886@kindex PHDRS
4887@cindex program headers
4888@cindex ELF program headers
4889@cindex program segments
4890@cindex segments, ELF
4891The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4892@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4893loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4894program with the @samp{-p} option.
4895
4896When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4897reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4898program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4899This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4900interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4901
4902The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4903in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4904precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4905the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4906not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4907
4908The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4909generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4910ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4911
4912This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4913@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4914
4915@smallexample
4916@group
4917PHDRS
4918@{
4919 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4920 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4921@}
4922@end group
4923@end smallexample
4924
4925The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4926of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4927header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4928with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4929must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4930is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4931
4932Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4933system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4934specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4935sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4936attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4937Section Phdr}.
4938
4939It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4940merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4941repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4942contain the section.
4943
4944If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4945then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4946not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4947convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4948placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4949default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4950segment at all.
4951
4952@kindex FILEHDR
4953@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4954You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4955the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4956The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4957file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4958include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4959segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4960these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4961
4962The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4963value of the keyword.
4964
4965@table @asis
4966@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4967Indicates an unused program header.
4968
4969@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4970Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4971the file.
4972
4973@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4974Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4975
4976@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4977Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4978found.
4979
4980@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4981Indicates a segment holding note information.
4982
4983@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4984A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4985ABI.
4986
4987@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4988Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4989
4990@item @var{expression}
4991An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4992be used for types not defined above.
4993@end table
4994
4995You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4996in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4997@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4998Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4999output section attribute.
5000
5001The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5002which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5003explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5004an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5005header.
5006
5007Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5008headers used on a native ELF system.
5009
5010@example
5011@group
5012PHDRS
5013@{
5014 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5015 interp PT_INTERP ;
5016 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5017 data PT_LOAD ;
5018 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5019@}
5020
5021SECTIONS
5022@{
5023 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5024 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5025 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5026 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5027 @dots{}
5028 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5029 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5030 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5031 @dots{}
5032@}
5033@end group
5034@end example
5035
5036@node VERSION
5037@section VERSION Command
5038@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5039@cindex symbol versions
5040@cindex version script
5041@cindex versions of symbols
5042The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5043only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5044symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5045a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5046shared library.
5047
5048You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5049you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5050also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5051
5052The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5053@smallexample
5054VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5055@end smallexample
5056
5057The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5058Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5059version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5060version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5061version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5062scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5063library.
5064
5065The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5066examples.
5067
5068@smallexample
5069VERS_1.1 @{
5070 global:
5071 foo1;
5072 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5073 old*;
5074 original*;
5075 new*;
252b5132
RH
5076@};
5077
5078VERS_1.2 @{
5079 foo2;
5080@} VERS_1.1;
5081
5082VERS_2.0 @{
5083 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5084 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5085 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5086 "f(int, double)";
5087 @};
252b5132
RH
5088@} VERS_1.2;
5089@end smallexample
5090
5091This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5092version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5093The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5094a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5095of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5096symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5097is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5098in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5099However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5100name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5101
5102Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5103depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5104to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5105
5106Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5107depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5108and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5109
5110When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5111specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5112unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5113unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5114somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5115wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5116wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5117set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5118ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5119
5120The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5121they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5122could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5123However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5124
0f6bf451 5125Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5126in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5127symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5128won't.
5129
5130@smallexample
7c9c73be 5131@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5132@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5133
252b5132
RH
5134When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5135symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5136requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5137shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5138loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5139linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5140application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5141way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5142all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5143search for each symbol reference.
5144
5145The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5146doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5147that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5148functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5149the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5150required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5151that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5152versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5153the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5154
5155There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5156first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5157source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5158script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5159maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5160@smallexample
5161__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5162@end smallexample
5163@noindent
5164in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5165be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5166The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5167@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5168takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5169
5170The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5171function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5172an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5173version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5174linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5175
5176To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5177source file. Here is an example:
5178
5179@smallexample
5180__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5181__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5182__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5183__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5184@end smallexample
5185
5186In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5187unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5188example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5189@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5190
5191When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5192some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5193this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5194@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5195declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5196you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5197
5198If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5199within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5200(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5201specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5202
cb840a31
L
5203You can also specify the language in the version script:
5204
5205@smallexample
5206VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5207@end smallexample
5208
c0065db7 5209The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5210The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5211demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5212patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5213@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5214
86043bbb
MM
5215Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5216described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5217or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5218the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5219whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5220cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5221might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5222should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5223expect when you upgrade.
5224
252b5132
RH
5225@node Expressions
5226@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5227@cindex expressions
5228@cindex arithmetic
5229The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5230that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5231expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5232host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5233
5234You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5235
5236The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5237expressions.
5238
5239@menu
5240* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5241* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5242* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5243* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5244* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5245* Operators:: Operators
5246* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5247* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5248* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5249@end menu
5250
5251@node Constants
5252@subsection Constants
5253@cindex integer notation
5254@cindex constants in linker scripts
5255All constants are integers.
5256
5257As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5258octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5259hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5260@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5261@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5262value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5263
5264@cindex scaled integers
5265@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5266@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5267@cindex suffixes for integers
5268@cindex integer suffixes
5269In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5270constant by
5271@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5272@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5273@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5274@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5275@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5276@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5277@tex
5278${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5279@end tex
5280@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5281respectively. For example, the following
5282all refer to the same quantity:
5283
252b5132 5284@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5285_fourk_1 = 4K;
5286_fourk_2 = 4096;
5287_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5288_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5289@end smallexample
5290
8a308ae8
NC
5291Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5292conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5293
0c71d759
NC
5294@node Symbolic Constants
5295@subsection Symbolic Constants
5296@cindex symbolic constants
5297@kindex CONSTANT
5298It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5299the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5300
5301@table @code
5302@item MAXPAGESIZE
5303@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5304The target's maximum page size.
5305
5306@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5307@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5308The target's default page size.
5309@end table
5310
5311So for example:
5312
5313@smallexample
9d5777a3 5314 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5315@end smallexample
5316
5317will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5318supported by the target.
5319
252b5132
RH
5320@node Symbols
5321@subsection Symbol Names
5322@cindex symbol names
5323@cindex names
5324@cindex quoted symbol names
5325@kindex "
5326Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5327and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5328Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5329specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5330keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5331@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5332"SECTION" = 9;
5333"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5334@end smallexample
5335
5336Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5337to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5338whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5339
ecca9871
L
5340@node Orphan Sections
5341@subsection Orphan Sections
5342@cindex orphan
5343Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5344are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5345script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5346output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5347placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5348attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5349same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5350If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5351at the end of the file.
5352
5353For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5354well as section flag.
5355
41911f68 5356If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5357the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5358__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5359section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5360orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5361representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5362character.
5363
252b5132
RH
5364@node Location Counter
5365@subsection The Location Counter
5366@kindex .
5367@cindex dot
5368@cindex location counter
5369@cindex current output location
5370The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5371current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5372location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5373within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5374anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5375
5376@cindex holes
5377Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5378moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5379location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5380and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5381doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5382
5383@smallexample
5384SECTIONS
5385@{
5386 output :
5387 @{
5388 file1(.text)
5389 . = . + 1000;
5390 file2(.text)
5391 . += 1000;
5392 file3(.text)
563e308f 5393 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5394@}
5395@end smallexample
5396@noindent
5397In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5398located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5399followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5400@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5401@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5402specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5403
5c6bbab8
NC
5404@cindex dot inside sections
5405Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5406current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5407statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5408absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5409however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5410not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5411
5412@smallexample
5413SECTIONS
5414@{
5415 . = 0x100
5416 .text: @{
5417 *(.text)
5418 . = 0x200
5419 @}
5420 . = 0x500
5421 .data: @{
5422 *(.data)
5423 . += 0x600
5424 @}
5425@}
5426@end smallexample
5427
5428The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5429and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5430the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5431much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5432move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5433and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5434the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5435the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5436
b5666f2f
AM
5437@cindex dot outside sections
5438Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5439output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5440needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5441
5442@smallexample
5443SECTIONS
5444@{
5445 start_of_text = . ;
5446 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5447 end_of_text = . ;
5448
5449 start_of_data = . ;
5450 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5451 end_of_data = . ;
5452@}
5453@end smallexample
5454
5455If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5456not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5457between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5458should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5459blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5460the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5461sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5462statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5463special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5464place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5465as follows:
5466
5467@smallexample
5468SECTIONS
5469@{
5470 start_of_text = . ;
5471 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5472 end_of_text = . ;
5473
5474 start_of_data = . ;
5475 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5476 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5477 end_of_data = . ;
5478@}
5479@end smallexample
5480
5481This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5482@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5483placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5484assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5485a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5486section. So you could write:
5487
5488@smallexample
5489SECTIONS
5490@{
5491 start_of_text = . ;
5492 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5493 end_of_text = . ;
5494
5495 . = . ;
5496 start_of_data = . ;
5497 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5498 end_of_data = . ;
5499@}
5500@end smallexample
5501
5502Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5503@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5504
252b5132
RH
5505@need 2000
5506@node Operators
5507@subsection Operators
5508@cindex operators for arithmetic
5509@cindex arithmetic operators
5510@cindex precedence in expressions
5511The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5512the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5513@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5514@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5515@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5516@smallexample
5517precedence associativity Operators Notes
5518(highest)
55191 left ! - ~ (1)
55202 left * / %
55213 left + -
55224 left >> <<
55235 left == != > < <= >=
55246 left &
55257 left |
55268 left &&
55279 left ||
552810 right ? :
552911 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5530(lowest)
5531@end smallexample
5532Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5533(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5534(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5535@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5536@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5537@tex
5538\vskip \baselineskip
5539%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5540\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5541\hrule
5542\halign
5543{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5544height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5545&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5546height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5547\noalign{\hrule}
5548height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5549&highest&&&&&\cr
5550% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5551&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5552&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5553&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5554&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5555&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5556&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5557&7&&left&&|&\cr
5558&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5559&9&&left&&||&\cr
5560&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5561&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5562&lowest&&&&&\cr
5563height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5564\hrule}
5565@end tex
5566@iftex
5567{
5568@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5569@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5570@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5571}
5572@end iftex
5573@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5574
5575@node Evaluation
5576@subsection Evaluation
5577@cindex lazy evaluation
5578@cindex expression evaluation order
5579The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5580an expression when absolutely necessary.
5581
5582The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5583address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5584regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5585as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5586
5587However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5588until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5589other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5590for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5591
5592The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5593assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5594allocation.
5595
5596Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5597@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5598
5599If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5600available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5601following
5602@smallexample
5603@group
5604SECTIONS
5605 @{
a1ab1d2a 5606 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5607 @{ *(.text) @}
5608 @}
5609@end group
5610@end smallexample
5611@noindent
5612will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5613address}.
5614
5615@node Expression Section
5616@subsection The Section of an Expression
5617@cindex expression sections
5618@cindex absolute expressions
5619@cindex relative expressions
5620@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5621@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5622@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5623Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5624relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5625using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5626value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5627symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5628operations.
5629
abf4be64
AM
5630Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5631section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5632address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5633@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5634functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5635One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5636(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5637differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5638versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5639section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5640Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5641absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5642given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5643everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5644
5645In the following simple example,
252b5132 5646
7542af2a
AM
5647@smallexample
5648@group
5649SECTIONS
5650 @{
5651 . = 0x100;
5652 __executable_start = 0x100;
5653 .data :
5654 @{
5655 . = 0x10;
5656 __data_start = 0x10;
5657 *(.data)
5658 @}
5659 @dots{}
5660 @}
5661@end group
5662@end smallexample
252b5132 5663
7542af2a
AM
5664both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5665address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5666@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5667section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5668
5c3049d2
AM
5669For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5670addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5671
5672@itemize @bullet
5673@item
c05f749e
AM
5674Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5675operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5676absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5677@item
7542af2a
AM
5678Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5679relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5680and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5681@item
c05f749e
AM
5682Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5683in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5684address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5685before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5686@end itemize
5687
5688The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5689
5690@itemize @bullet
5691@item
5692An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5693@item
5694The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5695@item
9bc8bb33 5696The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5697relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5698(after above conversions) is also a number.
5699@item
5700The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5701relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5702section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5703@item
5704The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5705conversions) is an absolute address.
5706@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5707
5708You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5709to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5710create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5711section @samp{.data}:
5712@smallexample
5713SECTIONS
5714 @{
5715 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5716 @}
5717@end smallexample
5718@noindent
5719If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5720@samp{.data} section.
5721
7542af2a
AM
5722Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5723particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5724
252b5132
RH
5725@node Builtin Functions
5726@subsection Builtin Functions
5727@cindex functions in expressions
5728The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5729use in linker script expressions.
5730
5731@table @code
5732@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5733@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5734@cindex expression, absolute
5735Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5736of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5737value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5738normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5739
5740@item ADDR(@var{section})
5741@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5742@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5743Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5744script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5745the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5746@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5747@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5748the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5749@smallexample
5750@group
5751SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5752 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5753 @{
252b5132
RH
5754 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5755 @dots{}
5756 @}
5757 .output :
5758 @{
5759 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5760 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5761 @}
5762@dots{} @}
5763@end group
5764@end smallexample
5765
876f4090
NS
5766@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5767@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5768@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5769@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5770@cindex round up location counter
5771@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5772@cindex round up expression
5773@cindex align expression
5774Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5775to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5776doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5777arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5778expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5779equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5780
5781Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5782next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5783variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5784input sections:
252b5132
RH
5785@smallexample
5786@group
5787SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5788 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5789 *(.data)
5790 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5791 @}
5792@dots{} @}
5793@end group
5794@end smallexample
5795@noindent
5796The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5797a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5798a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5799of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5800
5801The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5802
362c1d1a
NS
5803@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5804@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5805@cindex section alignment
5806Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5807been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5808evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5809the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5810value in that section.
5811@smallexample
5812@group
5813SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5814 .output @{
5815 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5816 @dots{}
5817 @}
5818@dots{} @}
5819@end group
5820@end smallexample
5821
252b5132
RH
5822@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5823@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5824This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5825scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5826section.
5827
2d20f7bf
JJ
5828@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5829@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5830This is equivalent to either
5831@smallexample
5832(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5833@end smallexample
5834or
5835@smallexample
5836(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5837@end smallexample
5838@noindent
5839depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5840for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5841@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5842If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5843memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5844bytes in the on-disk file.
5845
5846This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5847any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5848@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5849be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5850working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5851
5852@noindent
5853Example:
5854@smallexample
5855 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5856@end smallexample
5857
5858@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5859@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5860This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5861evaluation purposes.
5862
5863@smallexample
5864 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5865@end smallexample
5866
a4f5ad88
JJ
5867@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5868@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5869This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5870@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5871When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5872does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5873@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5874boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5875it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5876@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5877
5878@smallexample
5879 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5880@end smallexample
5881
252b5132
RH
5882@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5883@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5884@cindex symbol defaults
5885Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5886defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5887return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5888default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5889shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5890the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5891existed, its value is preserved:
5892
5893@smallexample
5894@group
5895SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5896 .text : @{
5897 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5898 @dots{}
5899 @}
5900 @dots{}
5901@}
5902@end group
5903@end smallexample
5904
3ec57632
NC
5905@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5906@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5907Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5908
252b5132
RH
5909@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5910@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5911@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5912Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5913Section LMA}).
5914
5915@kindex MAX
5916@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5917Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5918
5919@kindex MIN
5920@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5921Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5922
5923@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5924@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5925@cindex unallocated address, next
5926Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5927This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5928use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5929output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5930
3ec57632
NC
5931@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5932@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5933Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5934
ba916c8a
MM
5935@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5936@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5937Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5938value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5939option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5940@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5941be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5942``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5943name.
5944
252b5132
RH
5945@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5946@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5947@cindex section size
5948Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5949been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5950evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5951@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5952@smallexample
5953@group
5954SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5955 .output @{
5956 .start = . ;
5957 @dots{}
5958 .end = . ;
5959 @}
5960 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5961 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5962@dots{} @}
5963@end group
5964@end smallexample
5965
5966@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5967@itemx sizeof_headers
5968@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5969@cindex header size
5970Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5971information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5972this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5973choose, to facilitate paging.
5974
5975@cindex not enough room for program headers
5976@cindex program headers, not enough room
5977When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5978@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5979number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5980addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5981additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5982room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5983the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5984script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5985you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5986command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5987@end table
5988
5989@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5990@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5991@cindex implicit linker scripts
5992If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5993an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5994linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5995linker will report an error.
5996
5997An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5998
5999Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6000assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6001commands.
6002
6003Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6004at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6005read. This can affect archive searching.
6006
6007@ifset GENERIC
6008@node Machine Dependent
6009@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6010
6011@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6012@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6013sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6014functionality are not listed.
6015
6016@menu
36f63dca
NC
6017@ifset H8300
6018* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6019@end ifset
6020@ifset I960
6021* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6022@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6023@ifset M68HC11
6024* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6025@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6026@ifset ARM
6027* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6028@end ifset
6029@ifset HPPA
6030* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6031@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6032@ifset M68K
6033* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6034@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6035@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6036* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6037@end ifset
2469cfa2 6038@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6039* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6040@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6041@ifset POWERPC
6042* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6043@end ifset
6044@ifset POWERPC64
6045* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6046@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6047@ifset SPU
6048* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6049@end ifset
74459f0e 6050@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6051* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6052@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6053@ifset WIN32
6054* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6055@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6056@ifset XTENSA
6057* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6058@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6059@end menu
6060@end ifset
6061
252b5132
RH
6062@ifset H8300
6063@ifclear GENERIC
6064@raisesections
6065@end ifclear
6066
6067@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6068@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6069
6070@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6071For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6072you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6073
6074@table @emph
6075@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6076@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6077@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6078targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6079program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6080respectively.
6081
6082@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6083@item synthesizing instructions
6084@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6085@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6086sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6087page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6088(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6089@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6090top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6091
6092@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6093@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6094biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6095which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6096page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6097(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6098@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6099the top page of memory).
6100
6101@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6102@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
610332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6104changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6105(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6106@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6107the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6108@end table
6109
6110@ifclear GENERIC
6111@lowersections
6112@end ifclear
6113@end ifset
6114
36f63dca 6115@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6116@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6117@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6118@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6119@node Renesas
6120@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6121
c2dcd04e
NC
6122@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6123H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6124options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6125@end ifset
6126@end ifclear
6127
6128@ifset I960
6129@ifclear GENERIC
6130@raisesections
6131@end ifclear
6132
6133@node i960
6134@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6135
6136@cindex i960 support
6137
6138You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6139specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6140family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6141incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6142linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6143libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6144search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6145
6146For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6147well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6148paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6149the names
6150
6151@smallexample
6152@group
6153try
6154libtry.a
6155tryca
6156libtryca.a
6157@end group
6158@end smallexample
6159
6160@noindent
6161The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6162two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6163
6164You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6165the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6166use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6167specifies a library.
6168
6169@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6170@cindex relaxing on i960
6171@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6172you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6173@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6174them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6175instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6176instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6177target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6178not itself call any subroutines).
6179
48229727
JB
6180@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6181@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6182@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6183The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6184
6185The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6186
85fdf906
AH
6187@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6188@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6189The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6190
36f63dca
NC
6191@ifclear GENERIC
6192@lowersections
6193@end ifclear
6194@end ifset
6195
6196@ifset ARM
6197@ifclear GENERIC
6198@raisesections
6199@end ifclear
6200
93fd0973
SC
6201@ifset M68HC11
6202@ifclear GENERIC
6203@raisesections
6204@end ifclear
6205
6206@node M68HC11/68HC12
6207@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6208
6209@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6210
6211@subsection Linker Relaxation
6212
6213For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6214optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6215
6216@table @emph
6217@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6218@item relaxing address modes
6219@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6220targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6221program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6222respectively.
6223
6224@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6225transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6226page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6227
6228@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6229When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6230of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6231addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6232@code{bset} instructions.
6233
6234@end table
6235
6236@subsection Trampoline Generation
6237
6238@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6239@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6240For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6241call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6242will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6243trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6244case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6245point to the function trampoline.
6246
6247@ifclear GENERIC
6248@lowersections
6249@end ifclear
6250@end ifset
6251
36f63dca 6252@node ARM
3674e28a 6253@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6254
6255@cindex ARM interworking support
6256@kindex --support-old-code
6257For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6258between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6259been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6260line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6261libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6262option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6263given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6264which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6265the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6266non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6267
6268@cindex thumb entry point
6269@cindex entry point, thumb
6270@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6271The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6272@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6273But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6274branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6275executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6276
ce11ba6c
KT
6277@cindex PE import table prefixing
6278@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6279The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6280the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6281element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6282import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6283
e489d0ae
PB
6284@cindex BE8
6285@kindex --be8
6286The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6287executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6288The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6289
3674e28a
PB
6290@cindex TARGET1
6291@kindex --target1-rel
6292@kindex --target1-abs
6293The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6294@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6295or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6296and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6297
6298@cindex TARGET2
6299@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6300The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6301@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6302meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6303@table @samp
6304@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6305@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6306@item abs
6307@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6308@item got-rel
6309@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6310@end table
6311
319850b4
JB
6312@cindex FIX_V4BX
6313@kindex --fix-v4bx
6314The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6315specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6316interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6317also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6318
6319In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6320linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6321@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6322
6323In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6324relocations are ignored.
6325
845b51d6
PB
6326@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6327@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6328Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6329relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6330
6331@smallexample
6332TST rM, #1
6333MOVEQ PC, rM
6334BX Rn
6335@end smallexample
6336
6337This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6338and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6339condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6340
33bfe774
JB
6341@cindex USE_BLX
6342@kindex --use-blx
6343The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6344BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6345situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6346code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6347each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6348
6349This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6350specify it if you are using that target.
6351
c6dd86c6
JB
6352@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6353@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6354The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6355bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6356instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6357to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6358the support code can read the intended values.
6359
6360The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6361intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6362and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6363intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6364full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6365you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6366
6367If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6368enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6369@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6370mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6371vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6372@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6373
6374If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6375potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6376such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6377first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6378instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6379the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6380are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6381
2de70689
MGD
6382@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6383@kindex --fix-arm1176
6384@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6385The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6386in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6387are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6388unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6389
9d5777a3 6390Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6391Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6392http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6393
bf21ed78
MS
6394@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6395@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6396The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6397warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6398enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6399linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6400using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6401not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6402
6403@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6404@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6405The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6406warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6407@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6408linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6409using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6410
726150b7
NC
6411@cindex PIC_VENEER
6412@kindex --pic-veneer
6413The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6414ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6415is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6416@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6417
6418@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6419@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6420The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6421code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6422perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6423placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6424controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6425The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6426duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6427group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6428code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6429where they should be placed.
6430
6431The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6432@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6433placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6434branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6435placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6436value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6437exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6438A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6439linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6440from the input sections.
6441
6442The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6443@samp{N = +1}.
6444
1a51c1a4
NC
6445Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6446only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6447otherwise.
6448
36f63dca
NC
6449@ifclear GENERIC
6450@lowersections
6451@end ifclear
6452@end ifset
6453
6454@ifset HPPA
6455@ifclear GENERIC
6456@raisesections
6457@end ifclear
6458
6459@node HPPA ELF32
6460@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6461@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6462@kindex --multi-subspace
6463When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6464import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6465The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6466stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6467multiple sub-spaces.
6468
6469@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6470@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6471Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6472stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6473@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6474sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6475a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6476the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6477conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6478prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6479A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6480branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6481@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6482@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6483detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6484positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6485
6486Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6487single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6488create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6489large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6490
6491@ifclear GENERIC
6492@lowersections
6493@end ifclear
6494@end ifset
6495
7fb9f789
NC
6496@ifset M68K
6497@ifclear GENERIC
6498@raisesections
6499@end ifclear
6500
6501@node M68K
6502@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6503
6504@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6505@kindex --got=@var{type}
6506The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6507The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6508@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6509the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6510@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6511entries only at non-negative offsets.
6512@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6513entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6514support such GOTs.
6515@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6516output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6517file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6518files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6519
6520@ifclear GENERIC
6521@lowersections
6522@end ifclear
6523@end ifset
6524
36f63dca
NC
6525@ifset MMIX
6526@ifclear GENERIC
6527@raisesections
6528@end ifclear
6529
6530@node MMIX
6531@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6532For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6533@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6534understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6535can translate between the two formats.
6536
6537There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6538Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6539registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6540equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6541@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6542global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6543this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6544symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6545
7a2de473
HPN
6546Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6547@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6548The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6549of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6550
6551Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6552are left out from an mmo file.
6553
6554@ifclear GENERIC
6555@lowersections
6556@end ifclear
6557@end ifset
6558
6559@ifset MSP430
6560@ifclear GENERIC
6561@raisesections
6562@end ifclear
6563
6564@node MSP430
6565@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6566For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6567will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6568just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6569
6570@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6571The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6572
6573@table @code
6574@item @samp{.vectors}
6575Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6576
6577@item @samp{.bootloader}
6578Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6579in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6580
6581@item @samp{.infomem}
6582Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6583this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6584
c0065db7 6585@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6586This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6587in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6588
6589@item @samp{.noinit}
6590Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6591
c0065db7 6592The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6593@end table
6594
6595@ifclear GENERIC
6596@lowersections
6597@end ifclear
6598@end ifset
6599
2a60a7a8
AM
6600@ifset POWERPC
6601@ifclear GENERIC
6602@raisesections
6603@end ifclear
6604
6605@node PowerPC ELF32
6606@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6607@cindex PowerPC long branches
6608@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6609Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6610displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6611@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6612@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6613the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6614section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6615section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6616@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6617both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6618considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6619
6620@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6621@table @option
6622@cindex PowerPC PLT
6623@kindex --bss-plt
6624@item --bss-plt
6625Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6626generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6627the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6628writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6629@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6630PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6631compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6632BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6633
016687f8
AM
6634@kindex --secure-plt
6635@item --secure-plt
6636@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6637@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6638when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6639layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6640style BSS PLT.
6641
2a60a7a8
AM
6642@cindex PowerPC GOT
6643@kindex --sdata-got
6644@item --sdata-got
6645The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6646sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6647@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6648section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6649@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6650@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6651@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6652@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6653PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6654pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6655GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6656really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6657
6658@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6659@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6660@item --emit-stub-syms
6661This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6662symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6663
6664@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6665@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6666@item --no-tls-optimize
6667PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6668sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6669disable the optimization.
6670@end table
6671
6672@ifclear GENERIC
6673@lowersections
6674@end ifclear
6675@end ifset
6676
6677@ifset POWERPC64
6678@ifclear GENERIC
6679@raisesections
6680@end ifclear
6681
6682@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6683@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6684
6685@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6686@table @option
6687@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6688@kindex --stub-group-size
6689@item --stub-group-size
6690Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6691by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6692@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6693sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6694a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6695the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6696conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6697prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6698A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6699branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6700@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6701@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6702detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6703positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6704
6705Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6706single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6707create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6708large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6709
6710@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6711@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6712@item --emit-stub-syms
6713This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6714symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6715
6716@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6717@kindex --dotsyms
6718@kindex --no-dotsyms
6719@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6720These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6721in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6722function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6723code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6724properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6725to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6726@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6727dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6728feature.
6729
6730@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6731@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6732@item --no-tls-optimize
6733PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6734sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6735disable the optimization.
6736
6737@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6738@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6739@item --no-opd-optimize
6740PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6741corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6742the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6743Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6744
6745@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6746@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6747@item --non-overlapping-opd
6748Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6749@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6750the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6751entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6752
6753@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6754@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6755@item --no-toc-optimize
6756PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6757entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6758reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6759marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6760marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6761relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6762unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6763reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6764discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6765reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6766code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6767optimization.
6768
6769@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6770@kindex --no-multi-toc
6771@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6772If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6773@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6774where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6775entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6776total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6777grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6778TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6779calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6780help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
678164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6782Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6783
6784@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6785@kindex --no-toc-sort
6786@item --no-toc-sort
6787By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6788happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6789placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6790with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6791referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6792@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6793results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6794off this feature.
6795
6796@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6797@kindex --plt-align
6798@kindex --no-plt-align
6799@item --plt-align
6800@itemx --no-plt-align
6801Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6802aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6803boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6804are packed tightly.
6805
6806@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6807@kindex --plt-static-chain
6808@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6809@item --plt-static-chain
6810@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6811Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6812chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6813chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6814
6815@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6816@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6817@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6818@item --plt-thread-safe
6819@itemx --no-thread-safe
6820With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6821lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6822another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6823order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6824memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6825barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6826looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6827seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6828default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6829@end table
6830
6831@ifclear GENERIC
6832@lowersections
6833@end ifclear
6834@end ifset
6835
49fa1e15
AM
6836@ifset SPU
6837@ifclear GENERIC
6838@raisesections
6839@end ifclear
6840
6841@node SPU ELF
6842@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6843
6844@cindex SPU ELF options
6845@table @option
6846
6847@cindex SPU plugins
6848@kindex --plugin
6849@item --plugin
6850This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6851
6852@cindex SPU overlays
6853@kindex --no-overlays
6854@item --no-overlays
6855Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6856regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6857@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6858turns off all this special overlay handling.
6859
6860@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6861@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6862@item --emit-stub-syms
6863This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6864symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6865
6866@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6867@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6868@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6869This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6870function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6871on calls to non-overlay regions.
6872
6873@cindex SPU local store size
6874@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6875@item --local-store=lo:hi
6876@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6877the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6878range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6879
c0065db7 6880@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6881@kindex --stack-analysis
6882@item --stack-analysis
6883SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6884unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6885under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6886@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6887@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6888determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6889for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6890for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6891for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6892find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6893and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6894under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6895dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6896is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6897and calls will be given.
6898
c0065db7 6899@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6900@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6901@item --emit-stack-syms
6902This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6903in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6904These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6905functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6906functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6907such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6908The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6909@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6910@end table
6911
6912@ifclear GENERIC
6913@lowersections
6914@end ifclear
6915@end ifset
6916
36f63dca
NC
6917@ifset TICOFF
6918@ifclear GENERIC
6919@raisesections
6920@end ifclear
6921
6922@node TI COFF
6923@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6924@cindex TI COFF versions
6925@kindex --format=@var{version}
6926The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6927TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6928also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6929format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6930header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6931
6932@ifclear GENERIC
6933@lowersections
6934@end ifclear
6935@end ifset
6936
2ca22b03
NC
6937@ifset WIN32
6938@ifclear GENERIC
6939@raisesections
6940@end ifclear
6941
6942@node WIN32
6943@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6944
c0065db7 6945This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6946See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6947command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6948
6949@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6950@cindex import libraries
6951@item import libraries
69da35b5 6952The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6953libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6954regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6955archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6956support for creating such libraries provided with the
6957@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6958
c0065db7
RM
6959@item exporting DLL symbols
6960@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6961The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6962
6963@table @emph
6964@item using auto-export functionality
6965@cindex using auto-export functionality
6966By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6967which is controlled by the following command line options:
6968
0a5d968e
NC
6969@itemize
6970@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6971@item --exclude-symbols
6972@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6973@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6974@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6975@end itemize
6976
09e2aba4
DK
6977When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6978(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6979symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6980often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6981private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 6982options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
6983exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6984final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6985
6986If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6987command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6988if either of the following are true:
6989
6990@itemize
6991@item A DEF file is used.
6992@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6993@end itemize
dc8465bf 6994
c0065db7
RM
6995@item using a DEF file
6996@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6997Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6998an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6999exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7000name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7001command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7002
7003@example
7004gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7005@end example
7006
0a5d968e
NC
7007Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7008@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7009
dc8465bf
NC
7010Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7011
7012@example
4b5bd4e7 7013LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7014
7015EXPORTS
7016foo
7017bar
7018_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7019another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7020var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7021doo = foo == foo2
7022eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7023@end example
dc8465bf 7024
7fcab871 7025This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7026symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7027alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7028by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7029@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7030@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7031export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7032in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7033symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7034
6b31ad16
DS
7035The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7036name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7037the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7038
b45619c0
NC
7039When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7040library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7041@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7042executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7043
7044With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7045specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7046non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7047
7048If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7049or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7050filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7051
4b5bd4e7
DS
7052The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7053
7054@example
7055EXPORTS
7056 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7057 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7058 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7059@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7060
7061Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7062@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7063@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7064@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7065Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7066@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7067string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7068
7069The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7070
7071@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7072will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7073by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7074linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7075library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7076
7077@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7078The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7079the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7080@code{*_imp__foo}).
7081
7082@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7083well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7084read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7085variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7086the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7087extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7088application will behave unexpectedly.
7089
7090@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7091it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7092symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7093API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7094the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7095
4b5bd4e7
DS
7096See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7097other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7098
7099@cindex creating a DEF file
7100While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7101with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7102
7103@item Using decorations
7104@cindex Using decorations
7105Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7106itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7107declared as:
7108
7109@example
7110__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7111__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7112@end example
7113
7114All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7115any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7116this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7117the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7118
7119Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7120decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7121instead:
7122
7123@example
7124__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7125__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7126@end example
7127
c0065db7
RM
7128This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7129when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7130variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7131code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7132of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7133omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7134@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7135information.
c0065db7 7136@end table
dc8465bf 7137
2ca22b03
NC
7138@cindex automatic data imports
7139@item automatic data imports
7140The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7141by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7142compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7143issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7144code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7145c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7146initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7147decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7148platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7149command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7150The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7151suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7152trigger the feature's use.
7153
c0065db7 7154auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7155additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7156
c0065db7 7157"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7158documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7159
c0065db7
RM
7160The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7161occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7162One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7163below.
7164
7165@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7166For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7167object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7168offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7169field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7170in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7171without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7172The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7173references.
7174
c0065db7
RM
7175The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7176be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7177themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7178runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7179compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7180support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7181run without error on an older system.
7182
c0065db7
RM
7183@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7184enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7185
7186@cindex direct linking to a dll
7187@item direct linking to a dll
7188The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7189including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7190libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7191traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7192libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7193function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7194though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7195storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7196tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7197large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7198
c0065db7 7199Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7200@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7201of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7202perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7203select the dll instead of an import library.
7204
2ca22b03 7205
69da35b5
NC
7206For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7207to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7208
7209@example
45e948fe
NC
7210libxxx.dll.a
7211xxx.dll.a
7212libxxx.a
7213xxx.lib
69da35b5 7214cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7215libxxx.dll
7216xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7217@end example
7218
69da35b5
NC
7219before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7220
c0065db7
RM
7221(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7222where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7223@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7224file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7225@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7226
c0065db7
RM
7227Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7228@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7229was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7230various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7231could coexist on the same machine.
7232
2ca22b03
NC
7233The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7234applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7235libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7236
7237@example
7238bin/
7239 cygxxx.dll
7240lib/
7241 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7242 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7243@end example
7244
c0065db7
RM
7245Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7246done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7247
72481. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7249@example
7250gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7251@end example
2ca22b03 7252
69da35b5
NC
7253However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7254(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7255@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7256not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7257
2ca22b03
NC
72582. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7259directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7260should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7261making the app/dll.
7262
7263@example
7264ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7265@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7266
7267Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7268
7269@example
7270gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7271@end example
69da35b5
NC
7272
7273This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7274perfectly legal
7275
7276@example
7277bin/
7278 cygxxx-5.dll
7279lib/
c0065db7 7280 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7281@end example
7282
dc8465bf 7283Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7284even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7285@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7286
7287Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7288wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7289
72901. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7291work with auto-imported data.
7292
dc8465bf
NC
72932. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7294import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7295symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7296for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7297possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7298
45e948fe
NC
72993. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7300critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7301in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7302stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7303
69da35b5 7304So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7305true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7306a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7307binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7308massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7309requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7310will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7311
c0065db7 7312@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7313@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7314@item adding additional names
7315Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7316A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7317exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7318when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7319import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7320
c0065db7 7321@example
dc8465bf
NC
7322LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7323
7324EXPORTS
c0065db7 7325foo
dc8465bf 7326_foo = foo
c0065db7 7327@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7328
7329The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7330
7331Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7332source code using the "weak" attribute:
7333
c0065db7
RM
7334@example
7335void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7336void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7337@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7338
7339See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7340symbols.
7341
7342@item renaming symbols
7343Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7344kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7345@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7346DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7347created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7348
c0065db7 7349@example
dc8465bf
NC
7350LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7351
7352EXPORTS
7353_foo = foo
c0065db7 7354@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7355
7356The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7357@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7358@end table
dc8465bf 7359
0a5d968e 7360Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7361unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7362If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7363@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7364that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7365@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7366renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7367to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7368the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7369In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7370which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7371
7372@cindex weak externals
7373@item weak externals
7374The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7375weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7376defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7377are three variants of weak externals:
7378@itemize
7379@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7380called lazy externals.
7381@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7382This form is not presently implemented.
7383@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7384implemented.
7385@end itemize
7386As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7387are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7388uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7389
7390@cindex aligned common symbols
7391@item aligned common symbols
7392As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7393desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7394the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7395carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7396by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7397tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7398but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7399warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7400@end table
7401
7402@ifclear GENERIC
7403@lowersections
7404@end ifclear
7405@end ifset
7406
e0001a05
NC
7407@ifset XTENSA
7408@ifclear GENERIC
7409@raisesections
7410@end ifclear
7411
7412@node Xtensa
7413@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7414
7415@cindex Xtensa processors
7416The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7417@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7418specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7419keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7420example, with the command:
7421
7422@smallexample
7423SECTIONS
7424@{
7425 .text : @{
7426 *(.literal .text)
7427 @}
7428@}
7429@end smallexample
7430
7431@noindent
7432@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7433and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7434literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7435interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7436group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7437files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7438and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7439
43cd72b9 7440@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7441@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7442Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7443provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7444is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7445literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7446will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7447location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7448the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7449unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7450@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7451range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7452
7453For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7454to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7455instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7456instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7457instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7458@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7459hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7460By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7461switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7462density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7463instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7464performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7465linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7466a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7467
7468The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7469control the linker:
7470
7471@cindex Xtensa options
7472@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7473@item --size-opt
7474When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7475more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7476no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7477alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7478preserve the correctness of the code.
7479@end table
e0001a05
NC
7480
7481@ifclear GENERIC
7482@lowersections
7483@end ifclear
7484@end ifset
7485
252b5132
RH
7486@ifclear SingleFormat
7487@node BFD
7488@chapter BFD
7489
7490@cindex back end
7491@cindex object file management
7492@cindex object formats available
7493@kindex objdump -i
7494The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7495These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7496object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7497format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7498it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7499associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7500object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7501(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7502list all the formats available for your configuration.
7503
7504@cindex BFD requirements
7505@cindex requirements for BFD
7506As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7507several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7508BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7509formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7510been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7511BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7512may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7513
7514One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7515mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7516useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7517conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7518
7519@menu
7520* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7521@end menu
7522
7523@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7524@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7525@cindex opening object files
7526@include bfdsumm.texi
7527@end ifclear
7528
7529@node Reporting Bugs
7530@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7531@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7532@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7533
ff5dcc92 7534Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7535
7536Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7537it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7538to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7539work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7540@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7541
7542In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7543information that enables us to fix the bug.
7544
7545@menu
7546* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7547* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7548@end menu
7549
7550@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7551@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7552@cindex bug criteria
7553
7554If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7555
7556@itemize @bullet
7557@cindex fatal signal
7558@cindex linker crash
7559@cindex crash of linker
7560@item
7561If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7562@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7563
7564@cindex error on valid input
7565@item
ff5dcc92 7566If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7567
7568@cindex invalid input
7569@item
ff5dcc92 7570If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7571may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7572object files are correct.
7573
7574@item
7575If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7576improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7577@end itemize
7578
7579@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7580@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7581@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7582@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7583
7584A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7585products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7586recommend you contact that organization first.
7587
7588You can find contact information for many support companies and
7589individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7590distribution.
7591
ad22bfe8 7592@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7593Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7594@value{BUGURL}.
7595@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7596
7597The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7598@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7599fact or leave it out, state it!
7600
7601Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7602problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7603assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7604matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7605the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7606location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7607were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7608into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7609specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7610and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7611
7612Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7613the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7614on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7615
7616Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7617bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7618respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7619You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7620
7621To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7622
7623@itemize @bullet
7624@item
ff5dcc92 7625The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7626the @samp{--version} argument.
7627
7628Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7629the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7630
7631@item
ff5dcc92 7632Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7633patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7634
7635@item
7636The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7637version number.
7638
7639@item
ff5dcc92 7640What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7641``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7642
7643@item
7644The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7645observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7646list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7647sufficient.
7648
7649If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7650and then we might not encounter the bug.
7651
7652@item
7653A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7654bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7655provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7656bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7657state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7658requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7659we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7660attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7661
7662If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7663@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7664object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7665@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7666how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7667
7668@item
7669A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7670incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7671
ff5dcc92 7672Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7673will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7674not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7675a chance to make a mistake.
7676
7677Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7678say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7679copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7680C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7681and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7682fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7683you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7684any conclusion from our observations.
7685
7686@item
ff5dcc92 7687If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7688diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7689@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7690If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7691context, not by line number.
7692
7693The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7694sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7695@end itemize
7696
7697Here are some things that are not necessary:
7698
7699@itemize @bullet
7700@item
7701A description of the envelope of the bug.
7702
7703Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7704which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7705changes will not affect it.
7706
7707This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7708will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7709with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7710We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7711
7712Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7713of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7714output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7715less time, and so on.
7716
7717However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7718report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7719
7720@item
7721A patch for the bug.
7722
7723A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7724the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7725a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7726to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7727
ff5dcc92 7728Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7729construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7730through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7731able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7732fixed.
7733
7734And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7735patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7736help us to understand.
7737
7738@item
7739A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7740
7741Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7742things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7743@end itemize
7744
7745@node MRI
7746@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7747@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7748To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7749linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7750alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7751described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7752simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7753@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7754linker commands; these commands are described here.
7755
7756In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7757file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7758features to make use of them.
7759
7760You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7761@samp{-c} command-line option.
7762
7763Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7764command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7765blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7766MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7767issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7768
7769Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7770
7771You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7772lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7773The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7774
7775@table @code
7776@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7777@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7778@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7779Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7780the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7781@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7782your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7783script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7784commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7785input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7786@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7787
7788@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7789@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7790Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7791in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7792
7793@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7794
7795@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7796@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7797Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7798@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7799
7800@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7801@item BASE @var{expression}
7802Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7803absolute addresses) in the output file.
7804
7805@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7806@item CHIP @var{expression}
7807@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7808This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7809
7810@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7811@item END
7812This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7813
7814@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7815@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7816Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7817language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7818
7819@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7820@item
252b5132
RH
7821S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7822
7823@item
7824IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7825
7826@item
7827COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7828@samp{COFF}
7829@end enumerate
7830
7831@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7832@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7833Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7834@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7835
7836The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7837same line, with no change in its effect.
7838
7839@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7840@item LOAD @var{filename}
7841@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7842Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7843same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7844command line.
7845
7846@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7847@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7848@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7849MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7850option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7851
7852@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7853@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7854@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7855Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7856order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7857script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7858sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7859file, in the order specified.
7860
7861@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7862@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7863@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7864@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7865Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7866@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7867
7868@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7869@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7870@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7871@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7872You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7873specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7874If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7875@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7876@end table
7877
793c5807
NC
7878@node GNU Free Documentation License
7879@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7880@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7881
370b66a1
CD
7882@node LD Index
7883@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7884
7885@printindex cp
7886
7887@tex
7ca01ed9 7888% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
7889% meantime:
7890\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7891\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7892\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7893\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7894\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7895\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7896\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7897\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7898\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 7899% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
7900@end tex
7901
252b5132 7902@bye
This page took 1.017406 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.